West Air SOP and SRP
Short Description
West Air SOP and SRP...
Description
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GENERAL INFORMATION
FOREWORD Applicable to: ALL
The procedures contained in this Chapter are recommended by Airbus, and are consistent with the other Chapters of this manual. The Authorities do not certificate Standard Operating Procedures. The manufacturer presents them herein as the best way to proceed, from a technical and operational standpoint. They are continually updated and the revisions take into account Operator input, as well as manufacturer experience. In addition, Operators may amend them, as needed. However, the manufacturer recommends that Operators using the FCOM as onboard operational manual submit suggested changes to expedite publication, and maintain consistency of the manual. The Operator should note that they may rewrite this Chapter, at their own responsibility; this could, however, make it difficult to update the manual and keep it consistent with the other Chapters. The following sections contain expanded information on normal procedures. Standard Operating Procedures consist of inspections, preparations, and normal procedures. All items of a given procedure are listed in a sequence that follows a standardized scan of the cockpit panels, unless that sequence goes against the action priority logic, to ensure that all actions are performed in the most efficient way. Standard Operating Procedures are divided into flight phases, and are performed by memory. These procedures assume that all systems are operating normally, and that all automatic functions are used normally. Some normal procedures, that are non-routine will be found in the SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNIQUES (Refer to PRO-SUP-10 General), and in the SPECIAL OPERATIONS (Refer to PRO-SPO-20 General).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A
PRO-NOR-SOP-01 P 1/2 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GENERAL INFORMATION
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-01 P 2/2 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - FLIGHT PREPARATION
TECHNICAL CONDITION OF THE AIRCRAFT Applicable to: ALL
The crew will verify the technical state of the aircraft (deferred defect list), with regard to airworthiness, acceptability of malfunctions (MEL), and influence on the flight plan. WEATHER BRIEFING Applicable to: ALL
‐ The crew will get a weather briefing ‐ The briefing should include: • Actual and expected weather conditions, including runway conditions for takeoff and climb-out • Significant weather enroute, including winds and temperatures • Terminal forecasts for destination and alternate airports • Actual weather for destination and alternates, for short range flights and recent past weather, if available • Survey of the meteorological conditions at airports along the planned route. Weather can affect the choice of routing (for example, influence which route is quickest) and the choice of flight level. The flight crew must also consider the possibility of runways being contaminated at the departure and destination airfields. The flight crew must also verify ISA deviations and enroute icing conditions, and must consider the possibility of holding due to weather at the destination. NOTAMS Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
‐ The flight crew must examine NOTAMs for changes to routings, unserviceable navaids, availability of runways and approach aids etc, all of which may affect the final fuel requirement ‐ In order to prevent the risks of projection of debris towards the trimmable horizontal stabilizer and the elevators, it is not recommended to takeoff from runways in bad condition (loose surface, under repair, covered with debris...).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A to C →
PRO-NOR-SOP-02 P 1/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - FLIGHT PREPARATION
NOTAMS 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
‐ The flight crew must examine NOTAMs for changes to routings, unserviceable navaids, availability of runways and approach aids etc, all of which may affect the final fuel requirement ‐ In order to prevent the risks of projection of debris towards the trimmable horizontal stabilizer and the elevators, it is not recommended to takeoff from runways in bad condition (loose surface, under repair, covered with debris...) ‐ GPS Primary availability: • For RNP AR operations, the GPS Primary availability prediction should be checked to ensure the RNP will be available for the estimated time of operation. FLIGHT PLAN AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS Applicable to: ALL
‐ The crew will check the company flight plan for routing, altitudes, and flight time ‐ The Captain will check the ATC flight plan and ensure that: • It is filled in and filed, in accordance with the prescribed procedures • It agrees with the fuel flight plan routing. ‐ The crew will check the estimated load figures, and will calculate the maximum allowable takeoff and landing weights. OPTIMUM FLIGHT LEVEL Applicable to: ALL
The flight crew should choose a flight level that is as close to the optimum as possible. To obtain the optimum flight level, use the chart in the QRH or in the FCOM (Refer to PER-FPL-FLP-ALT-10 DEFINITIONS). As a general rule, an altitude that is 4 000 ft below the optimum produces a significant penalty (approximately 5 % of fuel). Flight 8 000 ft below the optimum altitude produces a penalty of more than 10 % against trip fuel. (The usual contingency allowance is 5 %). FUEL REQUIREMENTS Applicable to: ALL
COMPUTERIZED FLIGHT PLAN CHECK In most cases the flight crew uses a computer-derived flight plan to obtain the correct fuel requirements. Although these computerized requirements are normally accurate, the flight crew must check them for gross errors. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← C to F →
PRO-NOR-SOP-02 P 2/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - FLIGHT PREPARATION
The easiest way to do this is to use the “Quick Determination of F-PLN” tables (Refer to PER-FPL-FLP-QFP-40 FLIGHT PLANNING M.78). Although the aircraft will fly at ECON MACH that is based on the cost index, the M 0.78 table is accurate enough to permit the crew to check for gross error. Ensure that both the captain and the first officer have verified that the fuel calculations and required fuel on board are correct and that the figure complies with the applicable regulations. FUEL TRANSPORTATION The flight crew must check the policy covering the “tankering” of fuel on sectors where there is a favourable fuel price differential or operational requirement. Remember that carrying unnecessary extra fuel increases the fuel consumption for that sector and therefore reduces the economy of the operation (lower flex temperature, more tire and brake wear, more time in climb phase, lower optimum flight level etc).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F
PRO-NOR-SOP-02 P 3/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - FLIGHT PREPARATION
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-02 P 4/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - SAFETY EXTERIOR INSPECTION
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SAFETY EXTERIOR INSPECTION Applicable to: ALL
Items marked by (*) are the only steps to be completed during a transit stop. This inspection ensures that the aircraft and its surroundings are safe for operations. On arriving at the aircraft, check for obstructions in the vicinity, engineering activity, refueling, etc. * WHEEL CHOCKS................................................................................................ CHECK IN PLACE * LANDING GEAR DOORS....................................................................................CHECK POSITION WARNING
Do not pressurize the green hydraulic system without clearance from ground personnel, if any gear door is open. Remember that the green hydraulic system is pressurized if the yellow system is pressurized and the PTU is on AUTO.
* APU AREA............................................................................................................................. CHECK Observe that the APU inlet and outlet are clear.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A
PRO-NOR-SOP-03 P 1/2 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - SAFETY EXTERIOR INSPECTION
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-03 P 2/2 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
GENERAL Applicable to: ALL
Items marked by asterisks (*) are the only steps to be completed during a transit stop. The following procedure, performed by the PNF, ensures that all the required checks are performed before applying electrical power to avoid inadvertent operation of systems and danger to the aircraft and personnel. Included is APU starting and the establishment of electrical and pneumatic power.
AIRCRAFT POWER UP Applicable to: ALL
ENG MASTER 1 sw and MASTER 2 sw.............................................................................................OFF MODE selector.........................................................................................................................NORM L/G L/G lever.......................................................................................................CHECK DOWN position WIPERS CAPT WIPER selector and F/O WIPER selector........................................................................OFF ELEC If the aircraft has not been electrically supplied for 6 h or more, perform the following check: BAT 1 pb and BAT 2 pb......................................................................................... CHECK OFF BAT 1 and 2 VOLTAGE......................................................................... CHECK ABOVE 25.5 V Battery voltage above 25.5 V ensures a charge above 50 %. If battery voltage is below 25.5 V: A charging cycle of about 20 min is required. BAT 1 pb and BAT 2 pb..............................................................................................AUTO EXT PWR pb....................................................................................................................ON Check on ELEC SD page, that the battery contactor is closed and the batteries are charging. After 20 min: BAT 1 + 2 pb..................................................................................................................OFF CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A to B →
PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 1/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
BAT 1 and 2 VOLTAGE...................................................................CHECK ABOVE 25.5 V If battery voltage is above 25.5 V: BAT 1 pb and BAT 2 pb..............................................................................................AUTO If the APU is started on batteries only, it should be started within 30 min after the selection of batteries to AUTO (35 min after battery selection to AUTO, the battery charge is less than 25 % of maximum capacity). If the aircraft has been electrically supplied during the last 6 h: BAT 1 pb and BAT 2 pb.................................................................................................... AUTO EXT PWR pb (when AVAIL light is on)........................................................................................ ON AVAIL light goes out. HYD WARNING
Do not pressurize hydraulic systems without clearance from ground crew.
APU FIRE TEST/START Applicable to: ALL
APU FIRE APU FIRE pb-sw...................................................................................................IN and GUARDED AGENT lights ............................................................................................................................. OUT If the APU is already running, ensure that the following check has already been completed. If not, perform it. APU FIRE TEST pb................................................................................................................PRESS Check : ‐ APU FIRE warning on ECAM + CRC + MASTER WARN light (if AC Power available). ‐ APU FIRE pb-sw lighted red. ‐ SQUIB light and DISCH light on 1 Applicable to: B-6198, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215
APU START If EXT PWR pb ON light is on: APU MASTER SW pb-sw.......................................................................................................ON ON light comes on. APU SD page appears on ECAM.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to C →
PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 2/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
APU START pb-sw................................................................................................................. ON FLAP OPEN indication appears on APU SD page. On APU SD page, N and EGT rise. When N = 95 %: ‐ On APU SD page, AVAIL indication appears. ‐ On APU panel : START ON light goes out. AVAIL light comes on. 10 s later: ‐ DOOR SD page replaces APU SD page. EXT PWR pb............................................................................................................... AS RQRD External power may be kept ON to reduce the APU load, especially in hot conditions: When APU BLEED pb-sw is ON, keeping the EXT PWR pb ON enables to increase the bleed air flow of the APU, thus improving the efficiency of the air conditioning. If EXT PWR pb ON light is out: APU MASTER SW pb-sw.......................................................................................................ON ON light comes on. APU START pb-sw................................................................................................................. ON At 95 % RPM: ‐ START ON light goes out. ‐ AVAIL light comes on. ‐ APU GEN comes on line. ‐ APU SD page appears after 10 s. If required, adjust brightness on ECAM control panel. 10 s later: ‐ DOOR SD page replaces APU SD page. 2 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6199, B-6221, B-6222,
B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
APU START If the EXT PWR pb ON light is on: APU MASTER SW pb-sw.......................................................................................................ON ON light comes on. APU SD page appears on ECAM.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 3/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
APU START pb-sw................................................................................................................. ON Note:
Wait at least 5 s before selecting APU START pb-sw.
The FLAP OPEN indication appears on APU SD page. On the APU SD page, N and EGT rise. When N = 95 %: ‐ On APU SD page, AVAIL indication appears. ‐ On APU panel : START ON light goes out. AVAIL light comes on. 10 s later: ‐ DOOR SD page replaces APU SD page. EXT PWR pb............................................................................................................... AS RQRD External power may be kept ON to reduce the APU load, especially in hot conditions: When APU BLEED pb-sw is ON, keeping the EXT PWR pb ON enables to increase the bleed air flow of the APU, thus improving the efficiency of the air conditioning. If the EXT PWR pb ON light is off: APU MASTER SW pb-sw.......................................................................................................ON ON light comes on. APU START pb-sw................................................................................................................. ON Note:
Wait at least 5 s before selecting APU START pb-sw.
At 95 % RPM: ‐ START ON light goes out. ‐ AVAIL light comes on. ‐ APU GEN comes on line. ‐ APU SD page appears after 10 s. If required, adjust brightness on ECAM control panel. 10 s later: ‐ DOOR SD page replaces APU SD page.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C
PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 4/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
BEFORE WALK-AROUND Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT LIGHTS * COCKPIT LIGHTS..........................................................................................................AS RQRD ‐ Set OVHD INTEG LT knob, STBY COMPASS sw, DOME sw, ANN LT sw as required. ‐ Set FLOOD LT, and INTEG LT as required. DOME light should be on because it is the only lighting source in the EMER ELEC configuration. The DIM position is recommended for takeoff. Applicable to: ALL
F/CTL FLAPS.................................................................................................................. CHECK POSITION Check the upper ECAM display to confirm that the FLAPS position agrees with the handle position. * SPEEDBRAKE lever........................................................ CHECK RETRACTED and DISARMED WARNING
If flight control surface positions do not agree with the control handle positions, check with the maintenance crew before applying hydraulic power.
Applicable to: ALL
* PARKING BRAKE * PRK BRK handle.......................................................................................................................ON * ACCU PRESS indicator & BRAKES PRESS indicator...................................................... CHECK ‐ Check for normal indications. ‐ The ACCU PRESS indication must be in the green band. If required use the electric pump on yellow hydraulic system to recharge the brake accumulator. WARNING
Yellow and green hydraulic systems are pressurized from yellow electric pump. Get ground crew clearance before using the electric pump.
Applicable to: ALL
PROBE/WINDOW HEAT PROBE/WINDOW HEAT pb....................................................................................... CHECK AUTO
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
D→
PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 5/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
Applicable to: ALL
AIR COND APU BLEED pb-sw........................................................................................................................ON Do not use APU BLEED, if ground personnel confirms that ground air unit is connected. Pilots should also check the BLEED SD page to determine whether an HP ground air unit is connected (pressure in the bleed system). ALL WHITE LIGHTS....................................................................................................................OFF X BLEED selector..................................................................................................................... AUTO Zone temperature selectors............................................................................................... AS RQRD Full range temperature 24 ± 6 °C (75 ± 11 °F). Applicable to: ALL
CARGO HEAT SELECTORS...................................................................................................................... AS RQRD Set temperature selectors, as required. Applicable to: ALL
ELEC Scan and check that there are no amber lights, except GEN FAULT lights. Applicable to: ALL
VENT Check all lights off. 3 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
* ECAM * RCL key .............................................................................................................................PRESS ‐ Press the RCL key for at least 3 s to recall all warnings that have been cleared or cancelled ‐ If applicable, check warnings compatible with MEL, then CLEAR or CANCEL them. If any action is required, call maintenance personnel as soon as possible. * DOOR key...........................................................................................................................PRESS If the oxygen pressure is half boxed in amber, check “MIN FLT CREW OXY CHART” to verify if the pressure is sufficient for the scheduled flight (Refer to LIM-35 Cockpit Fixed Oxygen System). * HYD key..............................................................................................................................PRESS Check that the quantity indexes are in the normal filling range. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D→
PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 6/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
* ENG key..............................................................................................................................PRESS Check that the oil quantity is at or above 9.5 qts + estimated consumption (maximum average estimated consumption ∼ 0.5 qt/h). 4 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
* ECAM * RCL key .............................................................................................................................PRESS ‐ Press the RCL key for at least 3 s to recall all warnings that have been cleared or cancelled ‐ If applicable, check warnings compatible with MEL, then CLEAR or CANCEL them. If any action is required, call maintenance personnel as soon as possible. * DOOR key...........................................................................................................................PRESS If the oxygen pressure is half boxed in amber, check “MIN FLT CREW OXY CHART” to verify if the pressure is sufficient for the scheduled flight (Refer to LIM-35 Cockpit Fixed Oxygen System). * HYD key..............................................................................................................................PRESS Check that the quantity indexes are in the normal filling range. * ENG key..............................................................................................................................PRESS Check that the oil quantity is at or above 11 qt + estimated consumption (maximum average estimated consumption ∼ 0.3 qt/h). Applicable to: ALL
* OPERATIONS ENGINEERING BULLETINS (OEB) * OEB in QRH.......................................................................................................................CHECK Go to the OEB section of the QRH and review all OEBs (particularly red OEBs) that are applicable to the aircraft. Note:
If there is a transfer of duties during this flight, the flight crew must remind the incoming flight crew of the applicable OEB(s) during the briefing that is done when transferring the duties.
Applicable to: ALL
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT Check the following equipment: ‐ Life jackets stowed ‐ Axe stowed ‐ Smoke hoods or portable oxygen equipment and full face masks stowed and serviceable CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D→
PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 7/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
Portable fire extinguisher lockwired and pressure in the green area Smoke goggles stowed (smoke hoods ) Oxygen masks stowed Flashlights stowed Escape ropes stowed
Applicable to: ALL
RAIN REPELLENT Pressure and quantity indicators............................................................................................CHECK CAUTION
Never use rain repellent to wash the windshield and never use it on a dry windshield.
Applicable to: ALL
REAR AND OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS PANELS REAR and OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS panels......................................................... CHECK Check that all circuit breakers are set. Reset as necessary. Applicable to: ALL
GEARS PINS AND COVERS * GEARS PINS and COVERS..............................................................................................CHECK Check that three are on board and stowed.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D
PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 8/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
GENERAL Applicable to: ALL
The exterior inspection ensures that the overall condition of the aircraft and its visible components and equipment are safe for the flight. Complete inspection is normally performed by maintenance personnel or in the absence of maintenance personnel by a flight crew member before each originating flight. Items marked by asteriks (*) must be performed again by a flight crew member before each flight. The parking brake must be ON during the exterior inspection to allow the flight crew to check brake wear indicators. ‐ Check structure for impact damage ‐ Check that there is no evident fuel, oil or hydraulic leaks. WARNING
If a landing gear door is open, contact the maintenance crew before applying hydraulic power.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A
PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 1/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
EXTERIOR WALK-AROUND Applicable to: ALL
SCHEMATIC
Applicable to: ALL
LH FWD FUSELAGE * AOA probes................................................................................................................ CONDITION F/O and CAPT static ports..................................................................................................... CLEAR Avionics equipment vent air inlet valve.......................................................................... CONDITION Oxygen bay.......................................................................................................................... CLOSED Oxygen overboard discharge indicator.................................................................................. GREEN * Toilet servicing door ................................................................................................. CLOSED Applicable to: ALL
NOSE SECTION * Pitot probes.................................................................................................................CONDITION STBY static ports.................................................................................................................... CLEAR CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 2/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
* TAT probes................................................................................................................. CONDITION * Radome and latches................................................................................. CONDITION/LATCHED Forward avionics compartment door....................................................................................CLOSED Ground electrical power door (if not required.)....................................................................CLOSED Applicable to: ALL
NOSE L/G * Nose wheel chocks........................................................................................................ IN PLACE * Wheels and tires......................................................................................................... CONDITION Nose gear structure........................................................................................................ CONDITION Taxi, TO, turn-off lights...................................................................................................CONDITION Hydraulic lines and electrical wires................................................................................ CONDITION Wheel well.............................................................................................................................. CHECK Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED 1 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6215, B-6221,
B-6222, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006
RH FWD FUSELAGE RH + AFT avionic compartment doors................................................................................ CLOSED Avionic equipment vent air outlet valve..........................................................................CONDITION F/O-CAPT static ports.............................................................................................................CLEAR * AOA probe.................................................................................................................. CONDITION Forward cargo door and selector panel.................................................................................CHECK 2 Applicable to: B-6193, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6245, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
RH FWD FUSELAGE RH + AFT avionic compartment doors................................................................................ CLOSED Avionic equipment vent air outlet valve..........................................................................CONDITION F/O-CAPT static ports.............................................................................................................CLEAR * AOA probe.................................................................................................................. CONDITION Pax oxygen discharge indicator.............................................................................................GREEN Forward cargo door and selector panel.................................................................................CHECK Applicable to: ALL
LOWER CENTER FUSELAGE Potable water drain panel ............................................................................................ CLOSED Antennas......................................................................................................................... CONDITION Drain mast.......................................................................................................................CONDITION CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 3/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
RAM air inlet flap............................................................................................................ CONDITION LP and HP ground connection doors.................................................................................. CLOSED Anticollision light..................................................................................................................... CHECK CTR TK magnetic fuel level....................................................................................................FLUSH Pack air intakes and outlets................................................................................................... CLEAR Applicable to: ALL
RH CENTER WING Yellow hydraulic bay door....................................................................................................CLOSED Fuel panel.............................................................................................................................CLOSED Inner tank magnetic fuel......................................................................................................... FLUSH Fuel water drain valve inner tank....................................................................................... NO LEAK Landing light....................................................................................................................CONDITION * Slat 1...........................................................................................................................CONDITION Applicable to: ALL
ENG 2 LH SIDE Oil fill access door (CFM and IAE only).............................................................................. CLOSED Master magnetic chip detector access door (IAE only)....................................................... CLOSED * Thrust Recovery Nozzle (PW only)................................................................ CLOSED/LATCHED Hydraulic filter visual access door (PW only)...................................................................... CLOSED * Fan cowl doors............................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED * Drain mast..................................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK * Engine inlet and fan blades............................................................................................... CHECK Applicable to: ALL
ENG 2 RH SIDE Vent inlet (CFM only)..............................................................................................................CLEAR Pressure-relief/Start valve handle access door (CFM and IAE only)...................................CLOSED Nose cowl pressure relief door (PW only)........................................................................... CLOSED Engine oil fill access/starter air valve override access door (PW only)................................CLOSED Master chip detector access door (PW only).......................................................................CLOSED IDG servicing access door (PW only)..................................................................................CLOSED Turbine exhaust ..................................................................................................................... CLEAR Pylon/access panel......................................................................................... CONDITION/CLOSED
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 4/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
3 Applicable to: B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790,
B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006
RH WING LEADING EDGE * Slats 2, 3, 4, 5............................................................................................................ CONDITION Magnetic fuel level.................................................................................................................. FLUSH Fuel water drain valve........................................................................................................ NO LEAK Refuel coupling.....................................................................................................................CLOSED Surge tank air inlet................................................................................................................. CLEAR * Fuel ventilation overpressure disc..................................................................................... INTACT Navigation...................................................................................................................... CONDITION * Wing tip....................................................................................................................... CONDITION Applicable to: ALL
RH WING TRAILING EDGE Static dischargers................................................................................................................... CHECK * Control surfaces..........................................................................................................CONDITION * Flaps and fairings....................................................................................................... CONDITION Applicable to: ALL
RH L/G AND FUSELAGE * Chocks.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED * Wheels and tires......................................................................................................... CONDITION Brakes and brake wear ind............................................................................................ CONDITION Torque link damper .................................................................................................CONDITION Hydraulic lines........................................................................................................................ CHECK Landing gear structure........................................................................................................... CHECK Downlock springs................................................................................................................... CHECK Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED Ground hydraulic connection yellow.................................................................................... CLOSED Water drain mast .................................................................................................... CONDITION Shroud fuel drain............................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK Applicable to: ALL
RH AFT FUSELAGE Cargo door and selector panel.............................................................................................. CHECK Bulk door ........................................................................................................................ CHECK * Toilet service access door............................................................................................... CLOSED Outflow valve.................................................................................................................. CONDITION CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 5/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
Drain mast ..................................................................................................................... CONDITION Flight recorder access door ................................................................................................ CLOSED Applicable to: ALL
TAIL * Stabilizer, elevator, fin, and rudder.............................................................................CONDITION Static dischargers................................................................................................................... CHECK * Lower fuselage structure (tail impact on runway).......................................................CONDITION Applicable to: ALL
APU Access doors........................................................................................................................CLOSED Air intake......................................................................................................................... CONDITION Drain...............................................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK Oil cooler air outlet ................................................................................................................ CLEAR Exhaust....................................................................................................................................CLEAR Navigation light............................................................................................................... CONDITION Fire extinguisher overpressure indication (red disc).......................................................... IN PLACE Applicable to: ALL
LH AFT FUSELAGE * Stabilizer, elevator, fin, and rudder.............................................................................CONDITION * Potable water service door.............................................................................................. CLOSED Ground hydraulic connection blue door............................................................................... CLOSED Ground hydraulic connection green and reservoir filling door............................................. CLOSED Applicable to: ALL
LH LANDING GEAR * Chocks.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED * Wheels and tires......................................................................................................... CONDITION Brakes and brake wear indicator....................................................................................CONDITION Torque link damper .................................................................................................CONDITION Hydraulic lines........................................................................................................................ CHECK Landing gear structure........................................................................................................... CHECK Downlock springs................................................................................................................... CHECK Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 6/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
Applicable to: ALL
LH WING TRAILING EDGE * Flaps and fairing......................................................................................................... CONDITION * Control surfaces..........................................................................................................CONDITION Static dischargers................................................................................................................... CHECK Applicable to: ALL
LH WING LEADING EDGE * Wing tip....................................................................................................................... CONDITION Navigation light............................................................................................................... CONDITION Surge tank air inlet................................................................................................................. CLEAR * Fuel ventilation overpressure disc..................................................................................... INTACT Fuel water drain valve........................................................................................................ NO LEAK Inner and outer cell magnetic fuel level..................................................................................FLUSH * Slats 2, 3, 4, 5............................................................................................................ CONDITION 4 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
ENG 1 LH SIDE Oil fill access door................................................................................................................CLOSED * Fan cowl doors............................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED * Drain mast..................................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK * Engine inlet and fan blades............................................................................................... CHECK 5 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
ENG 1 LH SIDE Oil fill access door................................................................................................................CLOSED Master magnetic chip detector access door........................................................................ CLOSED * Fan cowl doors............................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED * Drain mast..................................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK * Engine inlet and fan blades............................................................................................... CHECK 6 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
ENG 1 RH SIDE Vent inlet................................................................................................................................. CLEAR Pressure relief/Start valve handle access door................................................................... CLOSED Turbine exhaust...................................................................................................................... CLEAR CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 7/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
Pylon/access panel......................................................................................... CONDITION/CLOSED 7 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
ENG 1 RH SIDE Pressure relief/Start valve handle access door................................................................... CLOSED Turbine exhaust...................................................................................................................... CLEAR Pylon/access panel......................................................................................... CONDITION/CLOSED Applicable to: ALL
LH CENTER WING * Slat 1...........................................................................................................................CONDITION Wing leading edge ventilation intake .............................................................................. CLEAR Fuel water drain valves.......................................................................................................NO LEAK Inner tank magnetic fuel......................................................................................................... FLUSH Landing lights..................................................................................................................CONDITION Hydraulic reservoir pressurization door............................................................................... CLOSED RAT doors............................................................................................................................ CLOSED
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B
PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 8/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
INTRODUCTION Applicable to: ALL
Items marked by (*) are the only steps to be completed during a transit stop. The PF and PNF should perform the cockpit preparation according to the panel scan sequence defined below (Refer to Panel Scan Sequence), and the task sharing defined in the QRH (Refer to QRH/Task Sharing for Abnormal/Emergency Procedures). DOCUMENTATION AND MAINTENANCE On entering the aircraft, obtain the technical (maintenance) log and verify that the certificate of maintenance and daily inspection (or similar) are up to date and signed. Check the deferred or carried-forward defects. If refueling has already been completed, check the uplift.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 1/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
PANEL SCAN SEQUENCE Applicable to: ALL
OVERHEAD PANEL Applicable to: ALL
It is a general rule to turn off all white lights for all the systems during the scan sequence. Therefore, these actions are not listed here.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
B to C →
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 2/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405
RCDR * RCDR GND CTL....................................................................................................................... ON CVR TEST.............................................................................................................................. PRESS Check low frequency signal through the loudspeakers. Note:
The PARK BRK handle must be ON to perform the CVR test.
1 Applicable to: B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747,
B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
RCDR * RCDR GND CTL....................................................................................................................... ON In order to perform the test, ensure that the PARK BRK is on. LOUDSPEAKER VOLUME knob....................................................................... OFF (BOTH SIDES) ACP INT/RAD sw (CAPT or F/O).....................................................................................SET to INT INTERPHONE VOLUME RECEPTION KNOB.................................................................. RELEASE Turn up the volume to the maximum. CVR TEST...................................................................................................PRESS AND MAINTAIN An audio test signal, and a beep every 4 s, should be heard through the loudspeakers. Once this is done, talk through the handmike, ensure that your voice is heard on the loudspeakers, and only then release the CVR test push button. Note:
‐ Only the handmike, not the boomset, should be used to carry out the test, as the audio signal must be heard on the loudspeakers. ‐ The flight crew may also hear an acoustic feedback during the test. The test is still valid if this acoustic feedback is heard.
Applicable to: ALL
EVAC CAPT & PURS/CAPT sw ..................................................................................................AS RQRD Usual position is CAPT. Applicable to: ALL
*ADIRS Mode selectors (3).......................................................................................................................NAV The ADIRS outputs are used by many of the aircraft’s systems: Set the selectors to NAV as soon as possible, to provide data to the related systems. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 3/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
Perform a complete alignment if: ‐ It is the first flight of the day ‐ The GPS is not available, and long segments in poor radio NAVAID coverage airspace are expected. For other flights, perform a fast alignment, if the residual ground speed is greater than 5 kt. The alignment is not necessary, if the residual ground speed is less than 5 kt. In case of ADIRS alignment, check that the ALIGN lights of the three ADIRS are on. For more information on ADIRS OPERATION, Refer to PRO-SUP-34-C ADIRS Operation General Applicable to: ALL
EXT LT EXTERIOR LIGHTS........................................................................................................... AS RQRD Set STROBE switch to AUTO, BEACON switch to OFF and remaining switches as required. Applicable to: ALL
*SIGNS * SIGNS............................................................................................................................. ON/AUTO * EMER EXIT LT selector......................................................................................................... ARM Note:
If the CIDS has been programmed (option) for a non-smoking flight, NO SMOKING or NO PORTABLE/ELEC DEVICE signs are permanently on, with the EXIT sw or NO SMOKING sw or NO PORTABLE/ELEC DEVICE sw at AUTO.
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN PRESS LDG ELEV knob....................................................................................................................... AUTO Applicable to: ALL
*AIR COND * PACK FLOW selector.................................................................................................... AS RQRD Select: LO : If the number of passengers is below 115. HI : For abnormally hot and humid conditions. NORM : For all other normal operating cases. If the APU is supplying, pack controllers select HI flow automatically, independent of the selector position. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 4/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
Applicable to: ALL
ELEC ECAM ELEC SD page...............................................................................................................CALL BAT 1 pb-sw and BAT 2 pb-sw....................................................................................OFF then ON Setting BAT 1 and BAT 2 to OFF, then to ON initiates a charging cycle. Check on the ECAM ELEC SD page that both batteries are loaded correctly : battery currents will drop below 60 A after 10 s and continue to decrease. If not, the flight crew must wait until the charging cycle of the batteries is completed (batteries no longer connected to DC BAT BUS) before performing this check again. Applicable to: ALL
*FUEL If the center tank is empty for the flight: Apply the following procedure, if your airline is affected by FUEL CTR TK PUMPS LO PR cautions on ground or in flight when the center tank is empty: FUEL MODE SEL pb-sw......................................................................................................MAN CTR TK PUMP 1 pb-sw and CTR TK PUMP 2 pb-sw......................................................... OFF If the center tank is NOT empty for the flight: CAUTION
If the FUEL MODE SEL pb is unduly left in the MAN position on ground, when the CTR TK PUMP 1 pb & CTR TK PUMP 2 pb are not in the OFF position: There is a possibility of fuel spillage, if there are any hidden failures.
FUEL MODE SEL pb........................................................................................... CHECK AUTO Applicable to: ALL
ENG 1 - ENG 2 FIRE ENG 1 FIRE pb and ENG 2 FIRE pb......................................................CHECK IN and GUARDED AGENT 1 light and AGENT 2 light................................................................................CHECK OUT ENG 1 TEST pb and ENG 2 TEST pb.................................................................................. PRESS Check : ‐ ENG 1 (2) FIRE pb-sw warning on ECAM + CRC + MASTER WARN light . ‐ ENG FIRE pb light red. ‐ SQUIB light and DISCH light on. ‐ FIRE light (on ENG panel) on.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 5/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
Applicable to: ALL
AUDIO SWITCHING PANEL AUDIO SWITCHING rotary selector........................................................................................ NORM 2 Applicable to: B-6193, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6245, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
PASSENGER OXYGEN PANEL TEST pb..............................................................................................................PRESS AND HOLD The following lights must come on: CHECK light, LO light, REGUL SYS 1 light and REGUL SYS 2 light, REGUL LO PR light, and CYLINDER FAULT light. Then release the pb to turn off the lights. PRESSURE quantity.............................................................................................................. CHECK Check that the oxygen pressure is sufficient for the scheduled flight. Applicable to: ALL
THIRD OCCUPANT AUDIO CONTROL PANEL PA reception knob.................................................................................................... Select reception ‐ This allows cabin attendant announcements to be recorded on the CVR. ‐ For proper recording, set volume at or above medium range. Applicable to: ALL
MAINTENANCE PANEL Check all lights out. If not out, select associated pushbutton switch to off.
CTR INSTRUMENT PANEL Applicable to: ALL
CTR INSTRUMENT PANEL - ISIS * ISIS..................................................................................................................................... CHECK ‐ Adjust brightness, check IAS, altimeter readings, altimeter settings and attitude display. ‐ Check no flags - Reset attitude, if necessary. Note:
Use of the ISIS bugs function is not recommended (Refer to DSC-34-25 Bugs Function)
*CLOCK Check time, and adjust, if necessary; elapsed time at zero, chrono at zero.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← C to D →
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 6/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
NOSEWHEEL STEERING * A/SKID & N/W STRG sw.......................................................................................................... ON
PEDESTAL Applicable to: ALL
ACP INT knob ..................................................................................... PRESS OUT / VOLUME CHECK Make sure that INT volume is turned up to permit contact with the ground crew. VHF ....................................................................................................................................... CHECK Check transmission and reception. HF (if required for flight).........................................................................................................CHECK ‐ Check transmission and reception. ‐ Do not transmit on HF during refueling. *WEATHER RADAR * * * *
Power supply sw .......................................................................................................CHECK OFF WINDSHEAR switch .......................................................................................... CHECK OFF GAIN..............................................................................................................................AUTO/CAL MODE............................................................................................................................. AS RQRD
SWITCHING PANEL SWITCHING panel................................................................................................................. CHECK Check all selectors at NORM. *ECAM CONTROL PANEL * STS pb................................................................................................................................ PRESS Check that INOP SYS display is compatible with MEL. If a message is displayed in MAINTENANCE STATUS, see PARKING procedure (Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-24-A Parking - General). * PRESS pb...........................................................................................................................PRESS Check that the CAB PRESS page displays LDG ELEV AUTO, to confirm the correct position of the LDG ELEV knob.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← D to E →
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 7/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
COCKPIT DOOR If required by local Airworthiness Authorities: ANN LT selector........................................................................................................................ TEST Check that the OPEN and FAULT lights (on the pedestal), and the three LED lights (on the overhead panel) come on. ANN LT selector.......................................................................................................................... BRT Check that all lights go off. CKPIT DOOR................................................................................CHECK CORRECT OPERATION ‐ Set the COCKPIT DOOR sw to the UNLOCK position. Check that the door opens, and that the OPEN light comes on ‐ Then, with the door fully open, release the COCKPIT DOOR sw (check that it returns to NORM position). Close the door. Check that it is locked, and that the OPEN Indication goes off. CKPIT DOOR MECHANICAL OVERRIDE............................................................................ CHECK Check that the door opens normally, and that it closes when the mechanical override is used. *ENG * THRUST LEVERS ................................................................................................... CHECK IDLE * ENG MASTER sw .................................................................................................... CHECK OFF * ENG MODE selector.............................................................................................. CHECK NORM *PARKING BRK * PARK BRK handle................................................................................................. ON THEN OFF ‐ Check pressure on the the BRAKE PRESS indicator. ‐ If chocks are in place, release the parking brake to increase brake cooling. GRAVITY GEAR EXTN GRAVITY GEAR EXTN....................................................................................... CHECK STOWED ATC ATC...............................................................................................................SET FOR OPERATION Perform the appropriate ATC selection to allow the ATC transponder to operate in mode S (Refer to DSC-34-50-10 Description), TCAS is on standby. To prevent possible interference to radar surveillance systems, TCAS should not be selected before the holding point/lining up. ALT RPTG..................................................................................................................................... ON CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←E→
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 8/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
ATC SYS 1........................................................................................................................... SELECT For RVSM operations (Refer to PRO-SPO-50 General), select SYS 1 if AP 1 is used, and SYS 2 if AP 2 is used. Only system 1 is available, in emergency electrical configuration. RMP Applicable to: ALL
RMP................................................................................................................................................... ON Green NAV light.................................................................................................................CHECK OFF SEL light.............................................................................................................................CHECK OFF COM FREQUENCIES................................................................................................................... TUNE Use VHF 1 for ATC (only VHF 1 is available in emergency electrical configuration), VHF 2 for ATIS and company frequencies. VHF 3 is normally devoted to ACARS. AIRFIELD DATA Applicable to: ALL
* Obtain data needed for initializing the system and preparing the cockpit. This should include, RUNWAY IN USE, ALTIMETER SETTING, and WEATHER DATA. ATC CLEARANCE Applicable to: ALL
* Obtain ATC clearance or use the probable clearance. ACARS Applicable to: ALL
* Initialize ACARS at that point or after FMGS INITIALIZATION, as per company policy.
FMGS INITIALIZATION Applicable to: ALL
At electrical power-up, the FMGSs and FCU run through various internal tests. Allow enough time (3 min) for tests’ completion, and do not start to press pushbuttons until the tests are over. If the “PLEASE WAIT” message appears, do not press any MCDU key until the message clears. Applicable to: ALL
* ENGINE & AIRCRAFT TYPE................................................................................................ CHECK CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← E to J →
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 9/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
Applicable to: ALL
* FM database validity.............................................................................................................. CHECK ‐ Press the DATA, and display the STATUS page (if not displayed). ‐ Check DATA BASE validity and stored WPT/NAVAIDS/RWY/ROUTES, if any. If applicable, review the stored data for deletion decision. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
* NAVAID DESELECTION....................................................................................................AS RQRD If NOTAMs warn of any unreliable DME or VOR/DME, display DATA, then POSITION MONITOR. Access the SEL NAVAID page, and deselect the related NAVAID. 3 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
* NAVAID DESELECTION....................................................................................................AS RQRD If NOTAMs warn of any unreliable DME or VOR/DME, display DATA, then POSITION MONITOR. Access the SELECTED NAVAIDS page, and deselect the related NAVAID. For an RNP AR departure, access the SELECTED NAVAIDS page and deselect all NAVAID(s) through the RADIONAV SELECTED/DESELECTED prompt. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222
* FLIGHT PLAN INITIALIZATION......................................................................................COMPLETE ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
Press the INIT key Insert CO RTE or city pair, and check FROM/TO Check/modify ALTN/CO RTE Enter flight number Note:
For ATC needs, the crew should enter exactly the entire flight number, as shown on the ICAO flight plan, without inserting any space, on the MCDU INIT page.
‐ Enter (and/or check) cost index ‐ Enter intended initial CRZ FL, or check if it was already supplied by the database. Modify it, if necessary, taking into account ATC constraints or expected gross weight ‐ Check and modify CRZ FL TEMP and tropopause level to agree with forecast ‐ Check latitude/longitude.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←J→
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 10/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
4 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
* FLIGHT PLAN INITIALIZATION......................................................................................COMPLETE ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
Press the INIT key Insert CO RTE or city pair, and check FROM/TO Check/modify ALTN/CO RTE Enter flight number Note:
For ATC needs, the crew should enter exactly the entire flight number, as shown on the ICAO flight plan, without inserting any space, on the MCDU INIT page.
‐ Enter (and/or check) cost index ‐ Enter intended initial CRZ FL, or check if it was already supplied by the database. Modify it, if necessary, taking into account ATC constraints or expected gross weight ‐ Check and modify CRZ FL TEMP and tropopause level to agree with forecast ‐ Enter (and/or check) the expected ground temperature for take off (GND TEMP) ‐ PRESS IRS INIT prompt ‐ Check alignment latitude/longitude. Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6400, B-6405
* FLIGHT PLAN INITIALIZATION......................................................................................COMPLETE ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
Press the INIT key Insert CO RTE or city pair, and check FROM/TO Check/modify ALTN/CO RTE Enter flight number Note:
For ATC needs, the flight crew should enter exactly the entire flight number, as shown on the ICAO flight plan, without inserting any space, on the MCDU INIT page.
‐ Enter (and/or check) cost index ‐ Enter intended initial CRZ FL, or check if it was already supplied by the database. Modify it, if necessary, taking into account ATC constraints or expected gross weight. ‐ Check and modify CRZ FL TEMP to agree with forecast ‐ Do not modify the default tropopause value (36 090 ft) displayed on the INIT page or the FUEL PRED page of the MCDU. ‐ Check latitude/longitude.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←J→
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 11/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
* ADIRS POSITION INITIALIZATION.................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE ‐ ADIRS position initialization involves setting the ADIRS navigation starting point. This is only necessary for a complete or fast alignment. ‐ Press the ALIGN IRS prompt to send the coordinates displayed on the MCDU INIT page to the three ADIRS. ‐ Use the defaulted departure airport reference point coordinates to initialize the ADIRS. ‐ When flying without GPS on long segments without radio coverage, it is better to use the gate coordinates to initialize the ADIRS: To insert these coordinates, slew them on the MCDU, and then press the ALIGN IRS prompt. Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403
* ADIRS POSITION INITIALIZATION.................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE ‐ ADIRS position initialization involves setting the ADIRS navigation starting point. This is only necessary for a complete or fast alignment. ‐ Press the ALIGN ON REF prompt to send the coordinates displayed on the IRS INIT page to the three ADIRS. ‐ Use the defaulted departure airport reference point coordinates to initialize the ADIRS. ‐ When flying without GPS on long segments without radio coverage, it is better to use the gate coordinates to initialize the ADIRS: To insert these coordinates, slew them on the MCDU, and then press the ALIGN IRS prompt. 5 Applicable to: B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747,
B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
* ADIRS POSITION INITIALIZATION.................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE ‐ ADIRS position initialization involves setting the ADIRS navigation starting point. This only occurs for a complete or fast alignment. The ADIRS are automatically initialized using the GPS position, without pilot intervention. ‐ If the GPS position is not available, the crew manually initializes the ADIRS, by pressing the ALIGN ON REF prompt. This sends the coordinates displayed on the IRS INIT page to the three ADIRS. ‐ When performing a manual initialization, use the defaulted departure airport reference point coordinates. If flying long segments in poor radio NAVAID coverage airspace; it is better to use the gate coordinates to initialize the ADIRS: To insert these coordinates, slew them on the MCDU, and then press the ALIGN IRS prompt.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←J→
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 12/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
Applicable to: ALL
* F-PLN A page...........................................................................................COMPLETE AND CHECK If CO RTE has been inserted, the F-PLN should automatically include the preferential or probable takeoff runway approach and landing runway, associated SIDs, STARs, transition and en-route waypoints. However some databases will only include departure and arrival airport IDENTs and en-route waypoints. The flight crew must check, modify, or insert (as applicable) the F-PLN in the following order, according to the data given by ATIS, ATC, or MET: ‐ Lateral revision at departure airport. Select RWY, then SID, then TRANS using scroll keys. ‐ Lateral revision at WPT for ROUTE modification if needed. (Refer to DSC-22_20-30-10-05 Lateral Revisions). ‐ Vertical revision. Check or enter climb speed limit, constraints according to ATC clearance. Enter step altitude as appropriate. * WINDS.................................................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE Choose between using trip wind and the forecast wind for CLB, CRZ and DES phases.(Refer to DSC-22_20-30-20-05 Flight Phases). * F-PLN......................................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ Check the F-PLN using F-PLN page and ND PLAN mode versus the computer (paper) flight plan or navigation chart. ‐ Check DIST TO DEST along the F-PLN. Compare it with the total distance computed for the flight with the computer (paper) flight plan. Applicable to: ALL
* SECONDARY FLIGHT PLAN............................................................................. AS APPROPRIATE This is routinely a copy of the active flight plan. However, consideration may be given to the following: a. Copy the active F-PLN, but modify it at a suitable WPT for an immediate return to the departure airfield in the event of, for example, engine failure b. If weather is below landings minima at the departure airfield, the secondary flight plan should be that required for a diversion immediately after takeoff c. If there is a chance of a change in runway or SID during taxi, prepare for it by copying the active flight plan and making the necessary modifications.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←J→
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 13/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
Applicable to: ALL
* RADIO NAV............................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ Check the VOR, ILS and ADF tuned by the FMGC. ‐ Modify them if required, and check that the correct identifier is displayed on the ND and PFD (ILS). If unsatisfactory, go through the audio check.
FMGS DATA INSERTION Applicable to: ALL
GROSS WEIGHT INSERTION (INIT B PAGE); * ZFW/ZFWCG..................................................................................................................... INSERT * BLOCK FUEL.....................................................................................................................INSERT CAUTION
The characteristic speeds displayed on the MCDU (green dot, F, S, VLS) are computed from the ZFW and ZFWCG entered by the crew on the MCDU. Therefore, this data must be carefully checked (Captain’s responsibility).
‐ The flight crew should insert the weights after completing all other insertions. This is to avoid cycles of prediction computations at each change in flight plan, constraints, etc. ‐ If ZFW and ZFWCG are unavailable, it is acceptable to enter the expected values in order to obtain predictions. Similarly, the flight crew may enter the expected fuel on board, if refueling has not been completed at that time. ‐ If ZFW, ZFWCG, and BLOCK FUEL are inserted, the FM will provide all predictions, as well as the EXTRA fuel, if any. Applicable to: ALL
TAKEOFF DATA INSERTION (PERF TAKEOFF PAGE): * V1, VR, V2.........................................................................................................................INSERT * FLX TO TEMP................................................................................................................... INSERT * THR RED/ACC altitude......................................................................................... SET or CHECK For noise abatement procedure, the crew must set the acceleration altitude at, or above, 3 000 ft, and adjust the values according to local noise abatement regulations. * ENG OUT ACC altitude.........................................................................................SET or CHECK * FLAPS/THS reminder........................................................................................................ INSERT * TO SHIFT....................................................................................................................... AS RQRD Enter the takeoff SHIFT distance, if takeoff is to be from an intersection. This is essential for position updating at takeoff and, consequently, for navigation accuracy.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← J to K →
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 14/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
6 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
RNP INSERTION (PROG PAGE): * RNP....................................................................................................................... SET or CHECK For RNP AR departure, check or insert the RNP. Applicable to: ALL
CLIMB, CRUISE, DESCENT, SPEED PRESELECTION * PRESET SPEEDS..........................................................................................................AS RQRD If the flight is cleared for a close-in turn or close-in altitude constraint, the flight crew may preselect green dot speed on the PERF CLB page. Once the CLB phase is active, the preselected speed will be displayed in the FCU speed window and on the PFD (blue symbol). Once the turn is completed or the altitude cleared, the pilot will resume the managed speed profile by pressing the SPD selector on the FCU. Similarly the pilot may select a CRZ MACH number on the PERF CRZ page (constant CRZ Mach segment, for example). When the CRZ phase is active, the preselected CRZ MACH number will be displayed in the FCU speed window and on the PFD. When ECON MACH number may be resumed, the crew presses the FCU SPD selector. In either of the above cases, the pilot may cancel the CLB or CRZ preselected SPD/MACH prior to activating the related phase, by selecting ECON on the PERF CLB or CRZ pages. SPD LIM is defaulted to 250 kt below 10 000 ft in the managed speed profile. This may be either cleared or modified on the VERT REV page at the origin (or a climb waypoint).
GLARESHIELD Applicable to: ALL
LIGHTING Glareshield integral light selector and flood light............................................................... AS RQRD *EFIS CONTROL PANEL * BARO REF...............................................................................................................................SET ‐ Set QNH (or QFE) on the EFIS control panel and on the standby altimeter ‐ Check barometer settings and altitude indications on the PFD and standby altimeter. (Tolerance limits are given in Refer to PRO-SUP-34-B Flight Instrument Tolerances - General). * FD................................................................................................................................ CHECK ON CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← K to L →
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 15/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
* LS................................................................................................................................... AS RQRD Note:
Do not engage the autothrust on ground, as it may generate the AUTO FLT A/THR OFF warning at engine start.
* ND mode and range.......................................................................................................AS RQRD MODE : Display the ARC mode on the ND if the takeoff direction is approximately the departure direction, or the ROSE NAV mode if the direction change is to be more than 70 ° after takeoff (to allow the ND to display the area behind the aircraft). RANGE : Set the minimum range to display the first waypoint after departure, or as required for weather radar. * VOR/ADF selector.......................................................................................................... AS RQRD Display VOR and ADF needles as needed. *FCU * SPD MACH window......................................................................................................... DASHED * HDG V/S -TRK FPA pb................................................................................................... HDG V/S * ALT window..................................................................... INITIAL EXPECTED CLEARANCE ALT LATERAL CONSOLES Applicable to: ALL
OXYGEN MASK TEST
On the OXYGEN panel: CREW SUPPLY pb......................................................................................................... CHECK ON On the glareshield: LOUDSPEAKERS..........................................................................................................................ON On the audio control panel: INT reception knob......................................................................................... PRESS OUT-ADJUST CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← L to M →
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 16/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
INT/RAD sw...................................................................................................................................INT On the mask stowage box: ‐ Press and hold the reset/test button in the direction of the arrow. • Check that the blinker turns yellow for a short time, and then goes black. ‐ Hold the reset/test button down, and press the emergency pressure selector. • Check that the blinker turns yellow and remains yellow, as long as the emergency pressure selector is pressed. • Listen for oxygen flow through the loudspeakers. Warn any engineer, whose headset may be connected to the nose intercom, that a loud noise may be heard when performing this check. ‐ Check that the reset/test button returns to the up position and the N 100 % selector is in the 100 % position. ‐ Press the emergency pressure selector again, and check that the blinker does not turn yellow. This ensures that the mask is not supplied. On the ECAM DOOR/OXY page: REGUL LO PR message...............................................................................................CHECK OFF The crew must perform this check after having checked all masks. It ensures that the LP valve is open, (due to residual pressure between the LP valve and the oxygen masks, an LP valve failed in the closed position may not be detected during the oxygen mask test). CM 1/2 INSTRUMENT PANELS 7 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210,
B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
PFD and ND brightness knob................................................................................................AS RQRD Check the ND outer ring to maximum range (radar display). LOUDSPEAKER.............................................................................................................................. SET One o'clock position. * PFD.........................................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ Check PFD/ND not transferred. ‐ Check for correct display, when ATT and HDG are available. ‐ Check IAS, FMA, initial target ALT, altimeter readings, VSI, altimeter settings, heading and attitude display.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← M to N →
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 17/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
* ND...........................................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ Check for correct display. ‐ Crosscheck compass indication on the ND and DDRMI. ‐ Check ground speed less than 5 kt, heading, initial waypoint, VOR ADF indications. CM 1/2 INSTRUMENT PANELS 8 Applicable to: B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790,
B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006
PFD and ND brightness knob................................................................................................AS RQRD Check the ND outer ring to maximum range (radar display). LOUDSPEAKER.............................................................................................................................. SET One o'clock position. * PFD.........................................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ Check PFD/ND not transferred. ‐ Check for correct display, when ATT and HDG are available. ‐ Check IAS, FMA, initial target ALT, altimeter readings, VSI, altimeter settings, heading and attitude display. ND...............................................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ Check for correct display. ‐ Crosscheck compass indication on the ND. ‐ Check ground speed less than 5 kt, heading, initial waypoint, VOR ADF indications. FMGS DATA CONFIRMATION Applicable to: ALL
* AIRFIELD DATA.................................................................................................................CONFIRM * ATC CLEARANCE.................................................................................................................OBTAIN * IRS ALIGN..............................................................................................................................CHECK On the POSITION MONITOR page, check that the IRS are in NAV mode, and check that the distance between each IRS and the FMS position is lower than 5 nm. Select ND in ROSE-NAV or ARC mode, and confirm that the aircraft position is consistent with the position of the airport, the SID and the surrounding NAVAIDs. * GROSS WEIGHT INSERTION.............................................................................................. CHECK The PNF checks FMGS data. * TO DATA..........................................................................................................CALCULATE/CHECK The PNF calculates and checks takeoff data. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← N to O →
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 18/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
* F-PLN A page........................................................................................................................ CHECK ‐ Select the EFIS CSTR pushbutton switch on. ‐ Ensure that the inserted F-PLN agrees with planned routes. Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 FMGS Initialization ‐ Use the scroll key to check the whole F-PLN thoroughly, using ND in PLAN mode as necessary. Tracks and distances between waypoints are displayed on the second line from the top of the MCDU. SID and EOSID tracks and distances must be checked from the appropriate navigation charts. ‐ Check speed and altitude constraints. Add new speed or altitude constraints it required. ATC Applicable to: ALL
* ATC CODE...................................................................................................................................SET FUEL Applicable to: ALL
* FUEL QTY.............................................................................................................................. CHECK ‐ Check that ECAM fuel on board corresponds to the F-PLN. ‐ Check that fuel imbalance is within limits. TAKEOFF BRIEFING Applicable to: ALL
* TAKEOFF BRIEFING........................................................................................................PERFORM PC DEDICATED TO MAINTENANCE Applicable to: ALL
Check that the Personal Computer (PC) dedicated to maintenance use and located in front of lower stowage at RH rear corner is stowed. Check that the light of its manual switch is off. If not, switch it off. Check that its associated printer located in front of RH rear of the cockpit is stowed.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← O to S
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 19/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 20/20 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START
BEFORE START CLEARANCE Applicable to: ALL
LOADSHEET.............................................................................................................................. CHECK The Captain should thoroughly check the Load and Trim Sheet (LTS), particularly for gross errors. Make sure that the loadsheet data is correct: Correct flight, correct aircraft, dry operating index, configuration, Fuel On Board, etc. Compare the ZFW/ZFWCG with the previously-entered data, and adjust if necessary. Check that the takeoff CG is within the LTS operational limits. TAKEOFF DATA.................................................................................PREPARE and CHECK/REVISE When the loadsheet is checked: ‐ The PNF checks or recalculates the takeoff speeds and flexible temperature, using the RTOW charts ‐ The PF independently calculates the takeoff speeds and flexible temperature, as a crosscheck Take particular care in determining the takeoff configuration. (Refer to PER-THR-FLX DEFINITION). Confirm any takeoff weight limitation. ‐ The PF checks (or revises) the takeoff data in the INIT B and PERF pages of the MCDU. SEATS, SEAT BELTS, HARNESSES, RUDDER PEDALS, ARMRESTS................................ADJUST The seat is correctly adjusted, when the pilot’s eyes are in line with the red and white balls. MCDU.................................................................................................IN TAKEOFF CONFIGURATION It is recommended that the crew display F-PLN on the PNF side, and PERF TAKEOFF on the PF side. EXT PWR...........................................................................................................................CHECK OFF Request that external power be removed. BEFORE START CHECKLIST down to the line.................................................................COMPLETE
AT START CLEARANCE Applicable to: ALL
PUSHBACK/START UP CLEARANCE..................................................................................... OBTAIN Obtain ATC pushback/startup clearance. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A to B →
PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 1/4 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START
Obtain ground crew clearance. NW STRG DISC.......................................................................................................CHECK AS RQRD In case of pushback (conventional or towbarless), the nosewheel steering selector bypass pin must be in the tow position. The ECAM’s NW STRG DISC, or N WHEEL STEERG DISC memos indicate this to the flight crew. CAUTION
If NW STRG DISC is not displayed on the ECAM, but the ground crew confirms that the steering selector bypass pin is in the towing position, then the pushback must not be performed. This is to avoid possible nose landing gear damage upon yellow hydraulic pressurization. To dispatch the aircraft in such a case, Refer to MMEL/MI-32-51 Nose Wheel Steering Control System.
In case of a powerpush by the main landing gear, the nosewheel steering selector should remain in the normal position to steer the aircraft (Refer to PRO-SUP-80-A Pushback with Power Push Unit Via the Main Landing Gear - General). WINDOWS and DOORS............................................................................................CHECK CLOSED ‐ Check that the cockpit windows are closed and locked ‐ Check, on the ECAM lower display, that all the aircraft doors are closed ‐ When required by local airworthiness authorities, check that the cockpit door is closed and locked (no cockpit door open/fault indication). If entry is requested, identify the person requesting entry before unlocking the door. With the cockpit door sw on NORM, the cockpit door is closed and locked. If entry is requested from the cabin, and if no further action is performed by the pilot, the cabin crew will be able to unlock the door by using the emergency access procedure. Except for crew entry/exit, the cockpit door should remain closed until engine shutdown. BEACON sw...................................................................................................................................... ON THR LEVERS................................................................................................................................. IDLE CAUTION
Engines will start, regardless of the thrust lever position; thrust will rapidly increase to the corresponding thrust lever position, causing a hazardous situation, if thrust levers are not at IDLE.
PARKING BRAKE ACCU PRESS indicator...............................................................................CHECK The ACCU PRESS indicator must be in the green band. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 2/4 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START
PARKING BRAKE................................................................................................................. AS RQRD If no pushback is required, check that the PRK BRK handle is ON, and check the BRAKES PRESS indicator CAUTION
If, during engine start with parking brake on, the aircraft starts to move due to a parking brake failure, immediately release the PRK BRK handle to restore braking by pedals.
If pushback is required, set the PRK BRK handle to OFF. CAUTION
Do not use brakes during pushback, unless required due to an emergency.
After pushback is completed, set the PRK BRK handle to ON and inform the ground crew to allow towbar to be disconnected. BEFORE START CHECKLIST below the line....................................................................COMPLETE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B
PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 3/4 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 4/4 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
AUTOMATIC ENGINE START Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222
Use the automatic engine start procedure in most circumstances. However, if the start aborts due to insufficient starter inlet air pressure (e.g. on high airfields, or in case of low pressure from an external pneumatic power group), it is recommended to use the manual start procedure, instead the automatic procedure. If, during the engine start, the ground crew reports a fuel leak from the engine drain mast, run the engine at idle for 5 min. If the leak disappears during these 5 min, the aircraft can be dispatched without maintenance action. If the leak is still present after 5 min, maintenance action may be required before the flight. ENG MODE selector........................................................................................................... IGN/START The lower ECAM displays the ENG SD page. START ENGINE 2..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE Engine 2 is usually started first. It powers the yellow hydraulic system, that pressurizes the parking brake. ENG 2 MASTER sw..........................................................................................................................ON ‐ Do not turn the ENG 2 MASTER sw ON before all amber crosses and messages have disappeared on the engine parameters (upper ECAM display). ‐ Parameter callouts are not mandatory. ‐ In case the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by the loss of ECAM DUs), abort the start by switching OFF the ENG 2 MASTER sw. Then, perform a 30 s dry crank. N2 increases
ON ECAM UPPER DISPLAY
At 16 % N2
ON ECAM LOWER DISPLAY Corresponding start valve in line. Bleed pressure indication green. Oil pressure increases. Indication of the active igniter (A or B).
At 22 % N2 ‐ FF increases 15 s (maximum) after fuel is on ‐ EGT increases ‐ N1 increases At 50 % N2
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
Start valve starts closing. (It is fully closed between 50 % and 56 % N2). Igniter indication off.
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 1/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
MAIN AND SECONDARY ENG. IDLE PARAMETERS.............................................CHECK NORMAL At ISA sea level : N1 about 19.5 % N2 about 58.5 % EGT about 390 °C FF about 275 kg/h (600 lb/h) Grey background on N2 indication disappears. START ENGINE 1..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE ENG 1 MASTER sw..........................................................................................................................ON Same procedure as for engine 2. Both pack valves reopen with 30 s delay after the second engine N2 is above 50 %. Note:
A PTU FAULT is triggered, if the second engine is started within 40 s following the end of the cargo doors operation. AUTOMATIC ENGINE START
Applicable to: MSN 5006 1
Use the automatic engine start procedure in most circumstances. However, if the start aborts due to insufficient starter inlet air pressure (e.g. on high airfields, or in case of low pressure from an external pneumatic power group), it is recommended to use the manual start procedure, instead the automatic procedure. If, during the engine start, the ground crew reports a fuel leak from the engine drain mast, run the engine at idle for 5 min. If the leak disappears during these 5 min, the aircraft can be dispatched without maintenance action. If the leak is still present after 5 min, maintenance action may be required before the flight. ENG MODE selector........................................................................................................... IGN/START The lower ECAM displays the ENG SD page. START ENGINE 2..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE Engine 2 is usually started first. It powers the yellow hydraulic system, that pressurizes the parking brake. ENG 2 MASTER sw..........................................................................................................................ON ‐ Do not turn the ENG 2 MASTER sw ON before all amber crosses and messages have disappeared on the engine parameters (upper ECAM display). ‐ Parameter callouts are not mandatory. ‐ In case the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by the loss of ECAM DUs), abort the start by switching OFF the ENG 2 MASTER sw. Then, perform a 30 s dry crank.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 2/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
ON ECAM UPPER DISPLAY
N2 increases At 16 % N2
ON ECAM LOWER DISPLAY Corresponding start valve inline. Bleed pressure indication green. Oil pressure increases. Indication of the active igniter (A or B).
At 22 % N2 ‐ FF increases (1) 15 s (maximum) after fuel is on ‐ EGT increases ‐ N1 increases At 50 % N2
(1)
Start valve starts closing. (It is fully closed between 50 % and 56 % N2). Igniter indication off. With the current ECU standard, the FF indication may be crossed up to approximately 200 kg/h (440 lb/h).
When idle is reached (AVAIL indication is displayed): MAIN AND SECONDARY ENG. IDLE PARAMETERS...................................... CHECK NORMAL At ISA sea level : N1 about 19.5 % N2 about 58.5 % EGT about 390 °C FF about 275 kg/h (600 lb/h) Grey background on N2 indication disappears. START ENGINE 1....................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE ENG 1 MASTER sw................................................................................................................... ON Same procedure as for engine 2. Both pack valves reopen with 30 s delay after the second engine N2 is above 50 %.
Note:
A PTU FAULT is triggered, if the second engine is started within 40 s following the end of the cargo doors operation. AUTOMATIC ENGINE START
Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182
Use the automatic engine start procedure in most circumstances. However, if the start aborts due to insufficient starter inlet air pressure (e.g. on high airfields, or in case of low pressure from an external pneumatic power group), it is recommended to use the manual start procedure, instead the automatic procedure. If, during the engine start, the ground crew reports a fuel leak from the engine drain mast, run the engine at idle for 5 min. If the leak disappears during these 5 min, the aircraft can be dispatched without maintenance action. If the leak is still present after 5 min, maintenance action may be required before the flight. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 3/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
ENG MODE selector........................................................................................................... IGN/START The lower ECAM displays the ENG SD page. START ENGINE 2..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE Engine 2 is usually started first. It powers the yellow hydraulic system, that pressurizes the parking brake. ENG 2 MASTER sw..........................................................................................................................ON ‐ Do not turn the ENG 2 MASTER sw ON before all amber crosses, except on N1 and N2, and messages, have disappeared on the engine parameters (upper ECAM display). ‐ The N1 and N2 indications show amber crosses until the actual N1 and N2 reach about 3.5 %. ‐ Parameter callouts are not mandatory. ‐ In case the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by the loss of ECAM DUs), abort the start by switching OFF the ENG 2 MASTER sw. Then, perform a 30 s dry crank. N2 increases
ON ECAM UPPER DISPLAY
30 s after ENG 2 MASTER sw is ON: ‐ FF increases.
ON ECAM LOWER DISPLAY Corresponding start valve inline. Bleed pressure indication green. Oil pressure increases. Indication of the active igniter (A or B).
20 s (maximum) after fuel is on ‐ EGT increases ‐ N1 increases prior to 34 % N2. At 43 % N2 Slightly above 43 % N2
Note:
Igniter indication off. Start valve crossline.
When the FADEC detects an impending hung start or hot start, the FADEC applies an automatic recovery sequence without an ECAM message. The crew will notice that dual ignition (A+B) is applied, and that fuel will be commanded OFF, and then re-commanded ON within 0.5 s. It is not necessary for the crew to shut down the engine.
MAIN AND SECONDARY ENG. IDLE PARAMETERS.............................................CHECK NORMAL At ISA sea level : N1 about 21.4 % N2 about 57.8 % EPR about 1.01 EGT about 414 °C FF about 350 kg/h (775 lb/h) Grey background on N2 indication disappears. START ENGINE 1..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 4/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
ENG 1 MASTER sw..........................................................................................................................ON Same procedure as for engine 2. Both pack valves reopen with 30 s delay after the second engine N2 is above 50 %. Note:
A PTU FAULT is triggered, if the second engine is started within 40 s following the end of the cargo doors operation. AUTOMATIC ENGINE START
2 Applicable to: B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709,
B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
Use the automatic engine start procedure in most circumstances. However, if the start aborts due to insufficient starter inlet air pressure (e.g. on high airfields, or in case of low pressure from an external pneumatic power group), it is recommended to use the manual start procedure, instead the automatic procedure. If, during the engine start, the ground crew reports a fuel leak from the engine drain mast, run the engine at idle for 5 min. If the leak disappears during these 5 min, the aircraft can be dispatched without maintenance action. If the leak is still present after 5 min, maintenance action may be required before the flight. ENG MODE selector........................................................................................................... IGN/START The lower ECAM displays the ENG SD page. START ENGINE 2..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE Engine 2 is usually started first. It powers the yellow hydraulic system, that pressurizes the parking brake. ENG 2 MASTER sw..........................................................................................................................ON ‐ Do not turn the ENG 2 MASTER sw ON before all amber crosses, except on N1 and N2, and messages, have disappeared on the engine parameters (upper ECAM display). ‐ The N1 and N2 indications show amber crosses until the actual N1 and N2 reach about 3.5 %. ‐ Parameter callouts are not mandatory. ‐ In case the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by the loss of ECAM DUs), abort the start by switching OFF the ENG 2 MASTER sw. Then, perform a 30 s dry crank.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 5/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
N2 increases
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
ON ECAM UPPER DISPLAY
30 s after ENG 2 MASTER sw is ON: ‐ FF increases.
ON ECAM LOWER DISPLAY Corresponding start valve inline. Bleed pressure indication green. Oil pressure increases. Indication of the active igniter (A or B).
20 s (maximum) after fuel is on ‐ EGT increases ‐ N1 increases prior to 34 % N2. At 43 % N2 Slightly above 43 % N2
Note:
Igniter indication off. Start valve crossline.
When the FADEC detects an impending hung start or hot start, the FADEC applies an automatic recovery sequence without an ECAM message. The crew will notice that dual ignition (A+B) is applied, and that fuel will be commanded OFF, and then re-commanded ON within 0.5 s. It is not necessary for the crew to shut down the engine.
When idle is reached (AVAIL indication is displayed): MAIN AND SECONDARY ENG. IDLE PARAMETERS...................................... CHECK NORMAL At ISA sea level : N1 about 21.4 % N2 about 57.8 % EPR about 1.01 EGT about 414 °C FF about 350 kg/h (775 lb/h) Grey background on N2 indication disappears. START ENGINE 1....................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE ENG 1 MASTER sw................................................................................................................... ON Same procedure as for engine 2. Both pack valves reopen with 30 s delay after the second engine N2 is above 50 %. Note:
A PTU FAULT is triggered, if the second engine is started within 40 s following the end of the cargo doors operation.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 6/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
GROUND RUN UP - DANGER AREAS 3 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 7/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 8/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
GROUND RUN UP - DANGER AREAS 4 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 9/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
←B
PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 10/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
AFTER START 1 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
ENG MODE selector....................................................................................................................NORM Turning the ENG MODE selector to NORM indicates the end of the start sequence. AFTER START actions may be performed. On ECAM lower display the WHEEL SD page replaces the ENG SD page. Leaving the ENG MODE selector at the START/IGN position would prevent continuous relight selection on the ground (would be supplied at lift off). In addition, the ENG SD page would remain displayed. The selector must be cycled to recover normal control of ignition and to display WHEEL SD page. After start, to avoid thermal shock, the pilot should operate the engine at idle or near idle for at least 2 min before advancing the thrust lever to high power. Taxi time at idle may be included in the warm-up period. The last engine started must run for at least 2 min before takeoff initiation, to ensure that takeoff is not initiated before the center tank pumps test is finished, since takeoff on center tank is prohibited. 2 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
ENG MODE selector....................................................................................................................NORM Turning the ENG MODE selector to NORM indicates the end of the start sequence. AFTER START actions may be performed. On ECAM lower display the WHEEL SD page replaces the ENG SD page. Leaving the ENG MODE selector at the START/IGN position would prevent continuous relight selection on the ground (would be supplied at lift off). In addition, the ENG SD page would remain displayed. The selector must be cycled to recover normal control of ignition and to display WHEEL SD page. After a shutdown period greater than 2 h, to avoid thermal shock, the pilot should operate the engine at idle or near idle for at least 5 min before advancing the thrust lever to high power. Taxi time at idle may be included in the warm-up period. The last engine started must run for at least 2 min before takeoff initiation, to ensure that takeoff is not initiated before the center tank pumps test is finished, since takeoff on center tank is prohibited. Applicable to: ALL
APU BLEED pb-sw..........................................................................................................................OFF ‐ Turn APU BLEED pb-sw off just after engine start to avoid ingestion of engine exhaust gases. ‐ APU BLEED valve closes, ENG BLEED valves open.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 1/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
3 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
ENG 1 ANTI ICE pb-sw and ENG 2 ANTI ICE pb-sw...........................................................AS RQRD Note:
Icing conditions may be expected when the OAT (on ground and for takeoff), or the TAT (in flight), is 10 °C or below, and there is visible moisture in the air (such as clouds, fog with low visibility, rain, snow, sleet, ice crystals), or when standing water, slush, ice or snow is present on the taxiways or runway.
During ground operation, when in icing conditions and the OAT is plus 3 °C or less, or if significant engine vibration occurs, the following procedure should be applied for ice shedding : CAUTION
If, during thrust increase, the aircraft starts to move, immediately retard the thrust levers to IDLE.
If ground surface conditions and the environment permit, the flight crew should accelerate the engines to minimum 50 % of N1 at intervals not greater than 15 min. There is no requirement to maintain the high trust settings. In addition, this engine acceleration should also be performed just before take-off, with particular attention to engine parameters to ensure normal engine operation. Note:
When performing the static run–up, the 61-74 % N1 range should be avoided.
If ENG ANTI ICE is selected ON and the valve(s) do not open (FAULT light(s) remain on), increase the N2 of the associated engine by about 5 %. When the valves are open, retard the thrust lever(s) to idle. If ENG ANTI ICE is switched on, the IGNITION memo appears on the ECAM because continuous ignition is automatically selected. 4 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
ENG 1 ANTI ICE pb-sw and ENG 2 ANTI ICE pb-sw...........................................................AS RQRD Note:
Icing conditions may be expected when the OAT (on ground and for takeoff), or the TAT (in flight), is 10 °C or below, and there is visible moisture in the air (such as clouds, fog with low visibility, rain, snow, sleet, ice crystals), or when standing water, slush, ice or snow is present on the taxiways or runway.
During ground operation, when in icing conditions for more than 30 min, the following procedure should be applied for ice shedding : CAUTION
If, during thrust increase, the aircraft starts to move, immediately retard the thrust levers to IDLE.
If ground surface conditions and the environment permit, the flight crew should accelerate the engines to approximately 70 % of N1 for 30 s at intervals not greater than 30 min. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 2/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
In addition, this engine acceleration should also be performed just before take-off, with particular attention to engine parameters to ensure normal engine operation. If ground surface or environment do not permit to accelerate the engine to 70 % N1, then power setting and dwell time should be as high as practical. When operating in conditions of freezing rain, freezing drizzle, freezing fog or heavy snow, ice shedding may be enhanced, by additional run ups at intervals, to not exceed 10 min, advancing throttles to 70 % N1 momentarily (no hold time). Applicable to: ALL
WING ANTI ICE pb-sw.......................................................................................................... AS RQRD When Wing Anti-Ice pb-sw is switched on, on the ground, the anti-ice valves open for about 30 s (test sequence), then close as long as the aircraft is on ground. Applicable to: ALL
APU MASTER pb-sw (if APU not required).................................................................................... OFF AVAIL light goes off after APU cooling period. Applicable to: ALL
GROUND SPOILERS..................................................................................................................... ARM Applicable to: ALL
RUD TRIM rotary selector............................................................................................................ ZERO If RUD TRIM rotary selector position indication is not at zero, press the RESET pb. Applicable to: ALL
FLAPS lever ................................................................................................................................... SET ‐ Set flaps for takeoff ‐ Check their position on the ECAM upper display ‐ If taxiing in slush, keep the flaps retracted until reaching the holding point before takeoff. Applicable to: ALL
PITCH TRIM handwheel..................................................................................................................SET Set takeoff CG on pitch trim handwheel. Applicable to: ALL
DOOR/OXY SD page............................................................................................................... SELECT ‐ Check that all slides are armed ‐ Deselect the DOOR/OXY SD page after verifying the slides.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 3/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
Applicable to: ALL
ECAM STATUS..........................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ PNF checks and PF crosschecks that there is no status reminder (STS) on the upper ECAM display ‐ If STS is displayed, press the STS key and review the ECAM Status page. Applicable to: ALL
CLEAR TO DISCONNECT.................................................................................................ANNOUNCE Request : Chocks removed Nose wheel steering bypass pin removed (NW STRG DISC memo not displayed) Interphone disconnect Hand signal on the left/right side. Applicable to: ALL
AFTER START CHECK LIST............................................................................................. COMPLETE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 4/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
TAXI Applicable to: ALL
TAXI clearance.......................................................................................................................... OBTAIN Applicable to: ALL
NOSE light...................................................................................................................................... TAXI Turn on the nosewheel light to TAXI day and night. RWY TURN OFF lights may be switched ON, as required. Applicable to: ALL
PARK BRK handle...........................................................................................................................OFF Check that brake pressure is zero (triple indicator). Slight residual pressure may be indicated for a short period of time. Applicable to: ALL
ELAPSED TIME ....................................................................................................................AS RQRD If ACARS is not installed, start ELAPSED TIME to record block time. Applicable to: ALL
THRUST LEVERS..................................................................................................................AS RQRD ‐ Little, if any, power above idle thrust will be needed to get the aircraft moving (40 % N1 maximum). Thrust should normally be used symmetrically. Once the aircraft starts to move, little thrust is required ‐ Use of the engine anti-ice increases ground idle thrust, so the pilot must use care on slippery surfaces ‐ The engines are close to the ground. Avoid positioning them over unconsolidated, or unprepared ground (beyond the edge of the taxiways, for example). Avoid high thrust settings at low ground speeds, which increase the risk of ingestion (FOD), and the risk of projection of debris towards the trimmable horizontal stabilizer and towards the elevators.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 1/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
Applicable to: ALL
BRAKES ....................................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ Once the aircraft starts moving: • Check the brake efficiency of the normal braking system: The aircraft must slow down when pressing the brake pedals. CAUTION
If the aircraft has been parked in wet conditions for a long period, the efficiency of the first brake application at low speed will be reduced.
If an arc is displayed on the WHEEL SD page, above the brake temperature, set the brake fans on. Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT CONTROLS..................................................................................................................CHECK 1. At a convenient stage, prior to or during taxi, and before arming the autobrake, the PF silently applies full longitudinal and lateral sidestick deflection. On the F/CTL SD page, the PNF checks full travel and the correct sense of all elevators and all ailerons, and the correct deflection and retraction of all spoilers. The PNF calls out “full up”, “full down”, ″neutral”, “full left”, “full right”, “neutral”, as each full travel/neutral position is reached. The PF silently checks that the PNF calls are in accordance with the sidestick order. Note:
In order to reach full travel, full sidestick must be held for a sufficient period of time.
2. The PF presses the PEDALS DISC pb on the nosewheel tiller, and silently applies full left rudder, full right rudder, and neutral. The PNF calls out “full left”, “full right”, “neutral”, as each full travel/neutral position is reached. 3. The PNF applies full longitudinal and lateral sidestick deflection, and silently checks full travel and the correct sense of all elevators and all ailerons, and the correct deflection and retraction of all spoilers, on the F/CTL SD page. Note:
The F/CTL SD page is automatically displayed for 20 s.
Applicable to: ALL
ATC clearance........................................................................................................................CONFIRM Applicable to: ALL
TAKEOFF DATA/CONDITIONS If takeoff data has changed, or in case of a runway change, prepare updated takeoff data, as appropriate: F-PLN (Runway).................................................................................................................... REVISE CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 2/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
FLAPS lever ....................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Select takeoff position. V1, VR, V2........................................................................................................................REINSERT FLX TO temperature.........................................................................................................REINSERT Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405 Impacted by TDU: 00013658 Taxi - AFS/Flight Instruments
AFS/FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS F-PLN (SID,TRANS)............................................................................................REVISE or CHECK Carefully confirm that the ATC clearance agrees with the FMGS, if NAV mode is to be used. INITIAL CLIMB SPEED AND SPEED LIMIT...................................................... MODIFY or CHECK Use VERT REV at departure, or at a CLB waypoint. CLEARED ALTITUDE ON FCU.................................................................................................. SET HDG ON FCU............................................................................................. IF REQUIRED, PRESET If a heading is required by the ATC after takeoff, in case of a radar vector departure, preset the heading on the FCU. NAV mode will be disarmed. RWY TRK mode will keep the aircraft on the runway track. FD.....................................................................................................CHECK BOTH SELECTED ON FMA........................................................................................................................................ CHECK FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS........................................................................................................CHECK RADAR (if required)...................................................................................................................... ON To check the radar and the departure path, set the MULTISCAN sw to MAN. The flight crew can then set the radar to the AUTO position. PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM .............................................................................. AUTO 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006 Impacted by TDU: 00013658 Taxi - AFS/Flight Instruments Impacted by TDU: 00013658 Taxi - AFS/Flight Instruments
AFS/FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS F-PLN (SID,TRANS)............................................................................................REVISE or CHECK Carefully confirm that the ATC clearance agrees with the FMGS, if NAV mode is to be used. INITIAL CLIMB SPEED AND SPEED LIMIT...................................................... MODIFY or CHECK Use VERT REV at departure, or at a CLB waypoint. CLEARED ALTITUDE ON FCU.................................................................................................. SET
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 3/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
HDG ON FCU............................................................................................. IF REQUIRED, PRESET If a heading is required by the ATC after takeoff, in case of a radar vector departure, preset the heading on the FCU. NAV mode will be disarmed. RWY TRK mode will keep the aircraft on the runway track. FD.....................................................................................................CHECK BOTH SELECTED ON FMA........................................................................................................................................ CHECK RNP pb .........................................................................................................................................ON Only for RNP AR departure. FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS........................................................................................................CHECK RADAR (if required)...................................................................................................................... ON To check the radar and the departure path, set the MULTISCAN sw to MAN. The flight crew can then set the radar to the AUTO position. PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM .............................................................................. AUTO 2 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727,
B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006 Impacted DU: 00011932 Taxi - AFS/Flight Instruments
AFS/FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS F-PLN (SID,TRANS)............................................................................................REVISE or CHECK Carefully confirm that the ATC clearance agrees with the FMGS, if NAV mode is to be used. INITIAL CLIMB SPEED AND SPEED LIMIT...................................................... MODIFY or CHECK Use VERT REV at departure, or at a CLB waypoint. CLEARED ALTITUDE ON FCU.................................................................................................. SET HDG ON FCU............................................................................................. IF REQUIRED, PRESET If a heading is required by the ATC after takeoff, in case of a radar vector departure, preset the heading on the FCU. NAV mode will be disarmed. RWY TRK mode will keep the aircraft on the runway track. FD.....................................................................................................CHECK BOTH SELECTED ON FMA........................................................................................................................................ CHECK RNP pb .........................................................................................................................................ON Only for RNP AR departure. FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS........................................................................................................CHECK RADAR (if required)...................................................................................................................... ON To check the radar and the departure path, set the MULTISCAN sw to MAN. The flight crew can then set the radar to the AUTO position. Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 200. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 4/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
1. If the weather is good, or no significant, in order to check that the radar is operating correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes 2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique. 3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground clutter appears on the upper part of the display. 4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM .............................................................................. AUTO 3 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215,
B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405 Impacted DU: 00011932 Taxi - AFS/Flight Instruments
AFS/FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS F-PLN (SID,TRANS)............................................................................................REVISE or CHECK Carefully confirm that the ATC clearance agrees with the FMGS, if NAV mode is to be used. INITIAL CLIMB SPEED AND SPEED LIMIT...................................................... MODIFY or CHECK Use VERT REV at departure, or at a CLB waypoint. CLEARED ALTITUDE ON FCU.................................................................................................. SET HDG ON FCU............................................................................................. IF REQUIRED, PRESET If a heading is required by the ATC after takeoff, in case of a radar vector departure, preset the heading on the FCU. NAV mode will be disarmed. RWY TRK mode will keep the aircraft on the runway track. FD.....................................................................................................CHECK BOTH SELECTED ON FMA........................................................................................................................................ CHECK FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS........................................................................................................CHECK RADAR (if required)...................................................................................................................... ON To check the radar and the departure path, set the MULTISCAN sw to MAN. The flight crew can then set the radar to the AUTO position. Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 200.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 5/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
1. If the weather is good, or no significant, in order to check that the radar is operating correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes 2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique. 3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground clutter appears on the upper part of the display. 4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM .............................................................................. AUTO Applicable to: B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417 Impacted DU: 00011932 Taxi - AFS/Flight Instruments
AFS/FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS F-PLN (SID,TRANS)............................................................................................REVISE or CHECK Carefully confirm that the ATC clearance agrees with the FMGS, if NAV mode is to be used. INITIAL CLIMB SPEED AND SPEED LIMIT...................................................... MODIFY or CHECK Use VERT REV at departure, or at a CLB waypoint. CLEARED ALTITUDE ON FCU.................................................................................................. SET HDG ON FCU............................................................................................. IF REQUIRED, PRESET If a heading is required by the ATC after takeoff, in case of a radar vector departure, preset the heading on the FCU. NAV mode will be disarmed. RWY TRK mode will keep the aircraft on the runway track. FD.....................................................................................................CHECK BOTH SELECTED ON FMA........................................................................................................................................ CHECK RNP pb .........................................................................................................................................ON Only for RNP AR departure. FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS........................................................................................................CHECK RADAR (if required)...................................................................................................................... ON To check the radar and the departure path, set the MULTISCAN sw to MAN. The flight crew can then set the radar to the AUTO position. Gain must be manually set to +8, when MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 150.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 6/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on the ND’s. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily MANUAL TILT. 2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard techniques.
PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM .............................................................................. AUTO Applicable to: ALL
ATC code....................................................................................................................... CONFIRM/SET Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
TERR ON ND .................................................................................................................AS RQRD ‐ In mountainous areas, consider displaying terrain on ND. ‐ If use of radar is required, consider selecting the radar display on the PF side, and TERR ON ND on the PNF side only. 4 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
TERR ON ND .................................................................................................................AS RQRD ‐ In mountainous areas, consider displaying terrain on ND. ‐ If use of radar is required, consider selecting the radar display on the PF side, and TERR ON ND on the PNF side only. For RNP AR operations (in mountainous terrain), set TAWS TERR ON both sides. If required, one flight crew may select the weather radar for weather avoidance. Applicable to: ALL
AUTO BRK......................................................................................................................................MAX ‐ ON light comes on ‐ Autobrake may be armed, with the parking brake on ‐ In the event of an aborted takeoff, selecting the MAX mode before takeoff improves safety. If the takeoff must be aborted, the autobrake system applies maximum braking as soon as the thrust levers are set to idle, if the ground speed is above 72 kt.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 7/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
Applicable to: ALL
TAKEOFF BRIEFING.............................................................................................................CONFIRM Applicable to: ALL
CABIN REPORT..................................................................................................................... RECEIVE Obtain cabin report from the purser, as a minimum : “CABIN SECURED FOR TAKEOFF” TO CONFIG pb...........................................................................................................................PRESS Check that ECAM upper display shows “TO CONFIG NORMAL”. TO MEMO........................................................................................................CHECK NO BLUE LINE Applicable to: ALL
BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECKLIST down to the line............................................................COMPLETE VISUAL GROUND GEOMETRY Applicable to: ALL
180 DEG TURN ON RUNWAY 5 Applicable to: B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790,
B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006
The standard width of a runway is 45 m. However, this aircraft only needs a runway width of 30 m (99 ft) for a 180 ° turn. The following procedure is recommended for performing a 180 ° turn on the runway.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← A to C →
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 8/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
FOR THE CM1: ‐ Taxi on the right of the runway and turn left, maintaining 25 ° of divergence from the runway axis ‐ When physically over the runway edge: • Turn the nosewheel fully right • On ENG 1, set N1 to between 30 % and 35 % (CFM engines), or the EPR to between 1.02 and 1.03 (IAE engines) • Set ENG 2 to idle. The Ground Speed (GS) for the entire maneuver should be between 5 kt and 8 kt, to prevent the width of the turn from increasing. FOR THE CM2: The procedure is symmetrical. (Taxi on the left-hand side of the runway).
Note:
To prevent the nosewheel from skidding on a wet runway, it is possible to perform the turn at a very low speed using asymmetric thrust and differential braking, as necessary.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 9/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
180 DEG TURN ON RUNWAY 6 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210,
B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
The standard width of a runway is 45 m. However, this aircraft only needs a runway width of 30 m (99 ft) for a 180 ° turn. The following procedure is recommended for performing a 180 ° turn on the runway. FOR THE CM1: ‐ Taxi on the right of the runway and turn left, maintaining 25 ° of divergence from the runway axis ‐ When about 2 m before the runway edge: • Turn the nosewheel fully right • On ENG 1, set N1 to between 30 % and 35 % (CFM engines), or the EPR to between 1.02 and 1.03 (IAE engines) • Set ENG 2 to idle. The Ground Speed (GS) for the entire maneuver should be between 5 kt and 8 kt, to prevent the width of the turn from increasing. FOR THE CM2: The procedure is symmetrical. (Taxi on the left-hand side of the runway).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 10/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
To prevent the nosewheel from skidding on a wet runway, it is possible to perform the turn at a very low speed using asymmetric thrust and differential braking, as necessary.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 11/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 12/12 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE TAKEOFF
BEFORE TAKEOFF Applicable to: ALL
TAKEOFF OR LINE UP CLEARANCE..................................................................................... OBTAIN Applicable to: ALL
TCAS Mode selector..................................................................................................TA or TA/RA The FAA recommends selecting TA mode: ‐ In case of known nearby traffic, which is in visual contact ‐ At particular airports and during particular procedures, identified by an Operator as having a significant potential for unwanted or inappropriate resolution advisories (closely-spaced parallel runways, converging runways...) Applicable to: ALL
APPROACH PATH CLEAR OF TRAFFIC.................................................................................CHECK Check that the approach path is clear of traffic, visually and using TCAS display on ND. Applicable to: ALL
PACK 1 and 2........................................................................................................................AS RQRD Consider selecting packs OFF, or APU bleed ON. This will improve performance when using TOGA thrust. In case of a FLEX takeoff, selecting packs OFF or APU bleed ON will reduce takeoff EGT, and thus reduce maintenance costs. The use of flex thrust may reduce maintenance costs. The effect is particularly significant with the first degrees of FLEX. Use of APU bleed is not authorized, if wing anti-ice is to be used. Applicable to: ALL
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.........................................................................................................................SET Set RWY TURN OFF sw, L LAND sw and R LAND sw, and NOSE sw at ON/TO in order to minimize bird strike hazard during takeoff. Set the STROBE selector to ON, before entering the runway. Applicable to: ALL
TAKEOFF RUNWAY..............................................................................................................CONFIRM Confirm that the line up is performed on the intended runway. Useful aids are: ‐ The runway markings, ‐ The runway lights, Be careful that in low visibility, edge lights could be mixed up with the center line lights. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-11 P 1/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE TAKEOFF
‐ The ILS signal, If the runway is ILS equipped, the flight crew can press the ILS pb (or LS pb): The LOC deviation should be centered after line up. ‐ The runway symbol on the ND, ‐ The Runway Awareness and Advisory System . Applicable to: ALL
SLIDING TABLE ...................................................................................................................STOW 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
RNP AR DEPARTURE GPS 1+2 on GPS MONITOR page............................................................... CHECK BOTH IN NAV GPS PRIMARY on PROG page........................................................................CHECK AVAILABLE FMA....................................................................................................................................... CHECK Verify NAV is armed (blue). Applicable to: ALL
If the brake fans are running: BRAKE TEMP......................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ If brake temperature is above 150 °C, delay takeoff. ‐ If brake temperature is below 150 °C, select brake fans off. 2 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN START, if heavy rain or severe turbulence is expected after takeoff. Note:
Continuous ignition is automatically selected, if the ENG 1 ANTI ICE pb and ENG 2 ANTI ICE pb are ON.
3 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN, if: ‐ The runway has standing water, or ‐ Heavy rain is falling, or ‐ Heavy rain or severe turbulence is expected after takeoff.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-11 P 2/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE TAKEOFF
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN CREW............................................................................................................................ADVISE Advise the cabin crew that takeoff is imminent. Applicable to: ALL
BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECKLIST below the line............................................................... COMPLETE Read the checklist below the line, when line-up clearance is obtained.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-11 P 3/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE TAKEOFF
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-11 P 4/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
TAKEOFF Applicable to: ALL
Rolling takeoff is permitted. TAKEOFF........................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE BRAKES................................................................................................................................. RELEASE 1 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
THRUST SETTING If the crosswind is at or below 20 kt and there is no tailwind: THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA ‐ To counter the nose-up effect of setting engine takeoff thrust, apply half forward stick until the airspeed reaches 80 kt. Release the stick gradually to reach neutral at 100 kt. ‐ PF progressively adjusts engine thrust in two steps: • from idle to about 50 % N1 (1.05 EPR). • from both engines at similar N1 to takeoff thrust. ▪ Once the thrust levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the captain keeps his hand on the thrust levers until the aircraft reaches V1. In case of tailwind or if crosswind is greater than 20 kt: THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA ‐ PF applies full forward stick. ‐ PF sets 50 % N1 (1.05 EPR) on both engines then increases thrust progressively to reach takeoff thrust at 40 kt ground speed, while maintaining stick full forward up to 80 kt. Release stick gradually to reach neutral at 100 kt. ‐ Once the Thrust Levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the captain keeps his hand on the Thrust Levers until the aircraft reaches V1. Note:
1. ENG SD page replaces WHEEL SD page on the ECAM lower display 2. The FADEC includes a keep-out zone, which is designed to avoid steady state operation inside a N1 range between 60 % and 74 % due to fan flutter phenomenon. This can result in discontinuous EPR increase during thrust setting (Refer to DSC-70-20 Functions).
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL......................................................................................... USE RUDDER At 130 kt (wheel speed), the connection between nosewheel steering and the rudder pedals is removed. Therefore, in strong crosswinds, more rudder input will be required at this point to prevent the aircraft from turning into the wind. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 1/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
CHRONO.................................................................................................................................START PFD/ND..................................................................................................................................... SCAN 1. Check the FMA on the PFD. The following modes are displayed: MAN TOGA (or MAN FLX xx) /SRS/RWY (or blank) / A/THR (in blue). Note:
If an ILS that corresponds to the departure runway is tuned, RWY mode appears. If not, no lateral mode appears until the aircraft lifts off.
2. Check the FMS position on the ND (aircraft on runway centerline). Note:
If GPS PRIMARY is not available, check the FMS position update.
FMA................................................................................................................................ ANNOUNCE 2 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
THRUST SETTING If the crosswind is at or below 20 kt and there is no tailwind: THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA ‐ To counter the nose-up effect of setting engine takeoff thrust, apply half forward stick until the airspeed reaches 80 kt. Release the stick gradually to reach neutral at 100 kt. ‐ PF progressively adjusts engine thrust in two steps: • from idle to about 50 % N1 (1.05 EPR). • from both engines at similar N1 to takeoff thrust. ▪ Once the thrust levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the captain keeps his hand on the thrust levers until the aircraft reaches V1. In case of tailwind or if crosswind is greater than 20 kt: THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA ‐ PF applies full forward stick. ‐ PF sets 50 % N1 (1.05 EPR) on both engines then rapidly increases thrust to about 70 % N1 (1.15 EPR) then progressively to reach takeoff thrust at 40 kt ground speed, while maintaining stick full forward up to 80 kt. Release stick gradually to reach neutral at 100 kt. ‐ Once the thrust levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the captain keeps his hand on the thrust levers until the aircraft reaches V1. Note:
ENG SD page replaces WHEEL SD page on the ECAM lower display.
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL......................................................................................... USE RUDDER At 130 kt (wheel speed), the connection between nosewheel steering and the rudder pedals is removed. Therefore, in strong crosswinds, more rudder input will be required at this point to prevent the aircraft from turning into the wind. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 2/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
CHRONO.................................................................................................................................START PFD/ND..................................................................................................................................... SCAN 1. Check the FMA on the PFD. The following modes are displayed: MAN TOGA (or MAN FLX xx) /SRS/RWY (or blank) / A/THR (in blue). Note:
If an ILS that corresponds to the departure runway is tuned, RWY mode appears. If not, no lateral mode appears until the aircraft lifts off.
2. Check the FMS position on the ND (aircraft on runway centerline). Note:
If GPS PRIMARY is not available, check the FMS position update.
FMA................................................................................................................................ ANNOUNCE 3 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
BEFORE REACHING 80 KT TAKEOFF N1......................................................................................................................... CHECK Check that the actual N1 of the individual engines has reached the N1 rating limit, before the aircraft reaches 80 kt. Check EGT. THRUST SET................................................................................................................. ANNOUNCE PFD and ENG indications.........................................................................................................SCAN Scan airspeed, N1, and EGT throughout the takeoff. 4 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
BEFORE REACHING 80 KT TAKEOFF EPR.......................................................................................................................CHECK Check that the actual EPR of the individual engines has reached the EPR rating limit, before the aircraft reaches 80 kt. Check EGT. THRUST SET................................................................................................................. ANNOUNCE PFD and ENG indications.........................................................................................................SCAN Scan airspeed, EPR, and EGT throughout the takeoff.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 3/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
Applicable to: ALL
REACHING 100 KT ONE HUNDRED KNOTS............................................................................................... ANNOUNCE ‐ The PF crosschecks and confirms the speed indicated on the PFD ‐ Below 100 kt the Captain may decide to abort the takeoff, depending on the circumstances ‐ Above 100 kt, rejecting the takeoff is a more serious matter. Applicable to: ALL
AT V1 V1....................................................................................................................................ANNOUNCE Applicable to: ALL
AT VR ROTATION ............................................................................................................................ORDER ROTATION........................................................................................................................ PERFORM ‐ At VR, initiate the rotation to achieve a continuous rotation with a rate of about 3 °/s, towards a pitch attitude 15 ° (12.5 °, one engine is failed) ‐ Minimize the lateral inputs on ground and during the rotation, to avoid spoiler extension ‐ In strong crosswind conditions, small lateral stick inputs may be used, if necessary, to aim at maintaining wings level ‐ After lift-off, follow the SRS pitch command bar. CAUTION
If a tailstrike occurs, avoid flying at an altitude requiring a pressurized cabin, and return to the originating airport for damage assessment.
Applicable to: ALL
WHEN POSITIVE CLIMB POSITIVE CLIMB........................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE LDG GEAR UP...................................................................................................................... ORDER LDG GEAR..................................................................................................................... SELECT UP AP.......................................................................................................................................AS RQRD Above 100 ft AGL, AP 1 or 2 may be engaged. FMA................................................................................................................................ ANNOUNCE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 4/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
Applicable to: ALL
AT THRUST REDUCTION ALTITUDE THRUST LEVERS..........................................................................................................................CL Move the thrust levers to the CL detent, when the flashing LVR CLB prompt appears on the FMA. A/THR is now active. In manual flight, the pilot must anticipate the change in pitch attitude in order to prevent the speed from decaying when thrust is reduced. FMA................................................................................................................................ ANNOUNCE PACK 1 and 2 (if applicable)........................................................................................................ ON Select PACK 1 on after CLB thrust reduction. Select PACK 2 on after flap retraction. Note:
1. Selecting pack on before reducing takeoff thrust would result in an EGT increase. 2. PACK 2 may be selected earlier, but not sooner than 10 s after PACK 1 is selected on, for passenger comfort. 3. If packs are not switched on after the takeoff phase, an ECAM caution will be triggered.
Applicable to: ALL
AT ACCELERATION ALTITUDE FMA................................................................................................................................ ANNOUNCE Check the target speed change from V2 + 10 to the first CLB speed (either preselected or managed). Note:
1. When THR RED and ACC ALT are equal, the FMA will change from MAN FLX/SRS/NAV to THR CLB/CLB/NAV. 2. If FCU-selected altitude is equal to or close to the acceleration altitude, then the FMA will switch from SRS to ALT*.
Applicable to: ALL
ABOVE ACCELERATION ALTITUDE (OR ONCE IN CLIMB PHASE) The following procedure ensures that the aircraft is effectively accelerating toward climb speed. At F speed: Note:
For takeoff in CONF 1 + F, “F” speed does not appear.
FLAPS 1.......................................................................................................................... ORDER FLAPS 1......................................................................................................................... SELECT
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 5/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
At S speed: FLAPS ZERO.................................................................................................................. ORDER FLAPS ZERO................................................................................................................. SELECT GRND SPLRS................................................................................................................ DISARM EXTERIOR LIGHTS.............................................................................................................. SET Set to OFF the NOSE sw and the RWY TURN OFF sw. The flight crew can maintain the LAND sw set to ON, according to airline policy or regulatory recommendations. Note:
The CRUISE SD page replaces the ENG SD page.
Applicable to: ALL
DERATED CLB OPS ..............Refer to FCOM Supplementary Procedures section (Power Plant)
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 6/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
Applicable to: ALL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 7/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 8/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER TAKEOFF
AFTER TAKEOFF Applicable to: ALL
APU BLEED pb......................................................................................................................AS RQRD If the APU has been used to supply air conditioning during takeoff, set the APU BLEED pb to OFF. For use of the APU BLEED, Refer to LIM-49-20 Envelope. APU MASTER SW pb............................................................................................................AS RQRD Applicable to: ALL
ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN, if severe turbulence or heavy rain is encountered. Applicable to: ALL
TCAS Mode selector ...........................................................................................................TA/RA Select TA/RA, if the takeoff has been performed with TA only. 1 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
ANTI ICE................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD ENG ANTI ICE should be ON, when icing conditions are expected with a TAT at, or below, 10 °C. Note:
With ENG ANTI ICE ON, the FADEC automatically selects continuous ignition. The IGNITION memo appears on ECAM.
2 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
ANTI ICE................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD ENG ANTI ICE should be ON, when icing conditions are expected with a TAT at, or below, 10 °C. Applicable to: ALL
AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB CHECKLIST down to the line................................................... COMPLETE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A
PRO-NOR-SOP-13 P 1/2 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER TAKEOFF
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-13 P 2/2 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
CLIMB Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006 Impacted by TDU: 00013057 Climb - Initial Climb
Normal vertical mode is CLB or OP CLB with managed speed active. PF MCDU..............................................................................................................................PERF CLB ‐ PF MCDU should be showing the PERF CLB page (allowing PF to monitor when the aircraft will reach the FCU selected altitude) but he may select other pages such as F-PLN page as may be tactically necessary. With the AP engaged, the PF will make any required flight plan revisions. ‐ The MCDU PROG page displays OPT FL and MAX REC FL. It is worth noting that this OPT FL is a function of the cost index (CI). ‐ The displayed MAX REC FL gives the aircraft at least a 0.3 g buffet margin. The pilot may enter a cruise flight level above this level into the MCDU and the FMGS will accept it, provided that it does not exceed the level at which the margin is reduced to 0.2 g. PNF MCDU...................................................................................................................................F-PLN PNF MCDU should be showing the F-PLN page (allowing him to enter any ATC long-term revisions to the lateral or vertical flight plan). CLIMB SPEED MODIFICATIONS If ATC, turbulence or operational considerations lead to a speed change: Select the new speed with FCU SPD knob and pull. Speed target is now “selected”. To return to managed speed mode, push FCU SPD knob. The speed target is now “managed”. Note:
The best speed (and rate of climb) for long-term situations lies between green dot speed and ECON speed. At high altitude, acceleration from green dot to ECON speed can take a long time.
EXPEDITE CLIMB If ATC requires a rapid climb through a particular level: Push the EXP pb on the FCU. The target speed is now green dot speed. FMA :THR CLB /EXP CLB/NAV
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 1/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
Use EXP only for short-term tactical situations. For the best overall economy fly at ECON IAS. To return to ECON CLB speed: Push ALT knob. Check FMA: THR CLB/CLB/NAV
BARO REF...................................................................................................................................SET At transition altitude (baro setting flashing on PFD) set STD on the EFIS control panel and standby altimeter. Cross-check baro settings and altitude readings. CRZ FL...................................................................................................................... SET AS RQRD ‐ If ATC clears the aircraft to its intended CRZ FL or above, there is no need to modify the CRZ FL entered in the INIT A page during cockpit preparation. The FCU will automatically take into account a higher CRZ FL selected with the FCU ALT knob. ‐ If ATC limits CRZ FL to a lower level than the one entered in the INIT A page (or present on the PROG page) the flight crew must insert this lower CRZ FL in the PROG page. Otherwise there is no transition into CRZ phase : the managed speed targets and Mach are not modified, and SOFT ALT mode is not available. In that case FMA will display: MACH/ALT/NAV instead of MACH/ALT CRZ/NAV. Applicable to: B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
Normal vertical mode is CLB or OP CLB with managed speed active. PF MCDU..............................................................................................................................PERF CLB ‐ PF MCDU should be showing the PERF CLB page (allowing PF to monitor when the aircraft will reach the FCU selected altitude) but he may select other pages such as F-PLN page as may be tactically necessary. With the AP engaged, the PF will make any required flight plan revisions. ‐ The MCDU PROG page displays OPT FL and MAX REC FL. It is worth noting that this OPT FL is a function of the cost index (CI). ‐ The displayed MAX REC FL gives the aircraft at least a 0.3 g buffet margin. The pilot may enter a cruise flight level above this level into the MCDU and the FMGS will accept it, provided that it does not exceed the level at which the margin is reduced to 0.2 g. PNF MCDU...................................................................................................................................F-PLN PNF MCDU should be showing the F-PLN page (allowing him to enter any ATC long-term revisions to the lateral or vertical flight plan).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 2/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
CLIMB SPEED MODIFICATIONS If ATC, turbulence or operational considerations lead to a speed change: Select the new speed with FCU SPD knob and pull. Speed target is now “selected”. To return to managed speed mode, push FCU SPD knob. The speed target is now “managed”. Note:
The best speed (and rate of climb) for long-term situations lies between green dot speed and ECON speed. At high altitude, acceleration from green dot to ECON speed can take a long time.
EXPEDITE CLIMB If ATC requires a rapid climb through a particular level: Push the EXP pb on the FCU. The target speed is now green dot speed. FMA :THR CLB /EXP CLB/NAV Note:
Use EXP only for short-term tactical situations. For the best overall economy fly at ECON IAS. To return to ECON CLB speed: Push ALT knob. Check FMA: THR CLB/CLB/NAV
BARO REF...................................................................................................................................SET At transition altitude (baro setting flashing on PFD) set STD on the EFIS control panel and standby altimeter. Cross-check baro settings and altitude readings. CRZ FL...................................................................................................................... SET AS RQRD ‐ If ATC clears the aircraft to its intended CRZ FL or above, there is no need to modify the CRZ FL entered in the INIT A page during cockpit preparation. The FCU will automatically take into account a higher CRZ FL selected with the FCU ALT knob. ‐ If ATC limits CRZ FL to a lower level than the one entered in the INIT A page (or present on the PROG page) the flight crew must insert this lower CRZ FL in the PROG page. Otherwise there is no transition into CRZ phase : the managed speed targets and Mach are not modified, and SOFT ALT mode is not available. In that case FMA will display: MACH/ALT/NAV instead of MACH/ALT CRZ/NAV.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 3/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006 Impacted DU: 00010245 Climb - Initial Climb 1
Normal vertical mode is CLB or OP CLB with managed speed active. PF MCDU..............................................................................................................................PERF CLB ‐ PF MCDU should be showing the PERF CLB page (allowing PF to monitor when the aircraft will reach the FCU selected altitude) but he may select other pages such as F-PLN page as may be tactically necessary. With the AP engaged, the PF will make any required flight plan revisions. ‐ The MCDU PROG page displays OPT FL and MAX REC FL. It is worth noting that this OPT FL is a function of the cost index (CI). ‐ The displayed MAX REC FL gives the aircraft at least a 0.3 g buffet margin. The pilot may enter a cruise flight level above this level into the MCDU and the FMGS will accept it, provided that it does not exceed the level at which the margin is reduced to 0.2 g. PNF MCDU...................................................................................................................................F-PLN PNF MCDU should be showing the F-PLN page (allowing him to enter any ATC long-term revisions to the lateral or vertical flight plan). CLIMB SPEED MODIFICATIONS If ATC, turbulence or operational considerations lead to a speed change: Select the new speed with FCU SPD knob and pull. Speed target is now “selected”. To return to managed speed mode, push FCU SPD knob. The speed target is now “managed”. Note:
The best speed (and rate of climb) for long-term situations lies between green dot speed and ECON speed. At high altitude, acceleration from green dot to ECON speed can take a long time.
EXPEDITE CLIMB If ATC requires a rapid climb through a particular level: Push the EXP pb on the FCU. The target speed is now green dot speed. FMA :THR CLB /EXP CLB/NAV
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 4/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
Use EXP only for short-term tactical situations. For the best overall economy fly at ECON IAS. To return to ECON CLB speed: Push ALT knob. Check FMA: THR CLB/CLB/NAV
BARO REF...................................................................................................................................SET At transition altitude (baro setting flashing on PFD) set STD on the EFIS control panel and standby altimeter. Cross-check baro settings and altitude readings. Note:
When STD is set on the EFIS control panel, the transponder transmits the last QNH or QFE baro setting to the Air Traffic Control (ATC). Only the FCU selected altitude, if used by the Air Traffic Control (ATC) on ground may be misinterpreted.
CRZ FL...................................................................................................................... SET AS RQRD ‐ If ATC clears the aircraft to its intended CRZ FL or above, there is no need to modify the CRZ FL entered in the INIT A page during cockpit preparation. The FCU will automatically take into account a higher CRZ FL selected with the FCU ALT knob. ‐ If ATC limits CRZ FL to a lower level than the one entered in the INIT A page (or present on the PROG page) the flight crew must insert this lower CRZ FL in the PROG page. Otherwise there is no transition into CRZ phase : the managed speed targets and Mach are not modified, and SOFT ALT mode is not available. In that case FMA will display: MACH/ALT/NAV instead of MACH/ALT CRZ/NAV. Applicable to: ALL
AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB CHECKLIST below the line...................................................... COMPLETE Applicable to: ALL
ANTI ICE ENG 1 pb and ANTI ICE ENG 2 pb .....................................................................AS RQRD ENG ANTI ICE should be ON when the aircraft encounters icing conditions, unless the SAT is below - 40 °C. Applicable to: ALL Impacted by TDU: 00013047 Climb - Radar Impacted by TDU: 00013047 Climb - Radar
RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 5/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
2 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210,
B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006 Impacted DU: 00010259 Climb - Radar
RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 200. Note:
1. If the weather is good, or no significant, in order to check that the radar is operating correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes. 2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique. 3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground clutter appears on the upper part of the display. 4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
3 Applicable to: B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417
Impacted DU: 00010259 Climb - Radar
RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +8 when, MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 150. Note:
1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on the ND’s. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily MANUAL TILT. 2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard techniques.
Applicable to: ALL
AT 10.000FT LAND lights........................................................................................................................ RETRACT SEAT BELTS......................................................................................................................AS RQRD EFIS option.........................................................................................................................AS RQRD Select CSTR on one side, for grid MORA, and ARPT on the other side. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 6/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
ECAM MEMO....................................................................................................................... REVIEW RAD NAV page...................................................................................................................... CHECK Clear manually tuned VORs from MCDU RAD NAV page. SEC F-PLN page............................................................................................................... AS RQRD Recopy the active flight plan in the secondary if an immediate return flight plan has been constructed previously. OPT/MAX ALT........................................................................................................................CHECK
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 7/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 8/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
CRUISE Applicable to: ALL
ECAM MEMO........................................................................................................................... REVIEW ECAM SYS PAGES..................................................................................................................REVIEW Periodically review system display pages and, in particular: ENG : Oil pressure and temperature BLEED : BLEED parameters ELEC : Parameters, GEN loads HYD : A slight decrease in quantity is normal. Fluid contraction during cold soak can be expected. Green system is lower than on ground, following landing gear retraction. FUEL : Fuel distribution. COND : Duct temperature, compared with zone temperature. Avoid large differences for passenger comfort. FLT CTL : Note any unusual control surface position. Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT PROGRESS................................................................................................................. CHECK Monitor flight progress in the conventional way. When overflying a waypoint: ‐ Check track and distance to the next waypoint. When overflying the waypoint, or every 30 min: ‐ Check FUEL : Check FOB (ECAM), and fuel prediction (FMGC), and compare with the computer flight plan or the in-cruise quick-check table (Refer to PER-CRZ-ICQ-40 IN CRUISE QUICK CHECK M.78). Check that the sum of the fuel on board and the fuel used is consistent with the fuel on board at departure. If the sum is unusually greater than the fuel on board at departure, suspect a frozen fuel quantity indication. Maintenance action is due before the next flight. If the sum is unusually smaller than the fuel on board at departure, or if it decreases, suspect a fuel leak. CAUTION
This check must also be performed each time a FUEL IMBALANCE procedure is necessary. Perform the check before applying the FUEL IMBALANCE procedure. If a fuel leak is confirmed, apply the FUEL LEAK procedure.
Applicable to: ALL
STEP FLIGHT LEVEL.............................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE ( Refer to PER-CRZ-ECI-10 OPTIMUM MACH NUMBER).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 1/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
Applicable to: ALL
NAVIGATION ACCURACY........................................................................................................ CHECK On aircraft equipped with GPS primary, no navigation accuracy check is required, as long as GPS PRIMARY is available. Otherwise, navigation accuracy must be monitored, at all times but especially when any of the following occurs: ‐ IRS only navigation. ‐ The PROG page displays LOW accuracy. ‐ “NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD” appears on the MCDU. Note:
Methods for checking accuracy: If the check is positive (error ≤ 3 N.m): FM position is reliable. Use ND (ARC or NAV) and managed lateral guidance. If the check is negative (error > 3 N.m): FM position is not reliable. Use raw data for navigation and monitor it. If there is a significant mismatch between the display and the real position: Disengage MANAGED NAV mode and use raw data navigation (possibly switching to ROSE VOR, so as not to be misled by FM data).
Applicable to: ALL Impacted by TDU: 00013068 Cruise - Radar Tilt Impacted by TDU: 00013068 Cruise - Radar Tilt
RADAR ...................................................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE 1 Applicable to: B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417
Impacted DU: 00010291 Cruise - Radar Tilt
RADAR ...................................................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +8, when MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 150. Note:
1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on the ND’s. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily MANUAL TILT. 2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard techniques.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 2/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
2 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210,
B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006 Impacted DU: 00010291 Cruise - Radar Tilt
RADAR ...................................................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below FL FL 200. Note:
1. If the weather is good, or no significant, in order to check that the radar is operating correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes. 2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique. 3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground clutter appears on the upper part of the display. 4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN TEMP......................................................................................................................... MONITOR Pay regular attention to the CRUISE SD Page, in order to monitor passenger cabin temperatures and adjust them, as necessary. Applicable to: ALL
If the oxygen mask has been used: OXYGEN MASK ................................................................................................................. CHECK Check that the oxygen mask has been properly stowed, Refer to DSC-35-20-10 General.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 3/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 4/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
DESCENT PREPARATION Applicable to: ALL
Descent preparation and approach briefing can take approximately 10 min, so they should begin approximately 80 nm before top of descent. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
LDG ELEV..................................................................................................................................CHECK Check on ECAM CRUISE page that LDG ELEV AUTO is displayed. WEATHER AND LANDING INFORMATION.............................................................................OBTAIN Check weather reports at ALTERNATE and DESTINATION airports. Airfield data should include runway in use for arrival. 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
LDG ELEV..................................................................................................................................CHECK Check on ECAM CRUISE page that LDG ELEV AUTO is displayed. WEATHER AND LANDING INFORMATION.............................................................................OBTAIN Check weather reports at ALTERNATE and DESTINATION airports. Airfield data should include runway in use for arrival. For RNP AR approach verify that wind and temperature are within limits. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
ARRIVAL page...................................................................................................... COMPLETE/CHECK Insert APPR, STAR, APPR VIA and TRANS if applicable. (Access by lateral revision at destination.) F-PLN A page............................................................................................................................ CHECK ‐ Ensure that the inserted F–PLN agrees with planned approach and missed approach. ‐ Use the scroll key to check the F–PLN thoroughly, using ND in PLAN mode as necessary. Tracks and distances between waypoints are displayed on the second line from the top of the MCDU. Approach and Missed Approach tracks and distances must be checked from the appropriate navigation charts. ‐ Check speed and altitude constraints. Add new speed or altitude constraints if required. ‐ In all cases, do not modify the final approach (FAF to runway or MAP), including altitude constraints.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 1/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
‐ Identify the position and the altitude of Final Descent Point (FDP) and check the value of the FPA after this FDP (aircraft must be stabilized before the FDP), ‐ Identify the Missed Approach Point. DES WIND................................................................................................................................. CHECK Enter winds for descent starting at cruise flight level. PERF CRUISE page.................................................................................................................. CHECK Modify the cabin descent rate if different pressure rate is required. PERF DES page........................................................................................................................ CHECK Prior to descent, access PERF DES page and check ECON MACH/SPD. If a speed other than ECON is required, insert that MACH or SPD into the ECON field. This new MACH or SPD is now the one for the descent path and T/D computation, and it will be used for the managed speed descent profile (instead of ECON). A speed limit of 250 kt below 10 000 ft is the defaulted speed, in the managed speed descent profile. The flight crew may delete or modify it if necessary on the VERT REV at DEST page. PERF APPR page................................................................................................. COMPLETE/CHECK Enter the QNH, temperature, and wind at destination. Note:
The entered wind should be the average wind given by the ATC or ATIS. Do not enter gust values. For example, if the wind is 150/20-25, insert the lower speed 150/20 (ground speed mini-function will cope with the gust).
Insert the minimum. Note:
To avoid undershooting the published minimum during go-around, due to aircraft inertia during pull-up, some Authorities may require Operators to add a specific number of feet to the published minimum.
CAUTION
Note:
If the QNH altimeter setting is used for an aircraft with the QFE option, Refer to PRO-SUP-34-D QNH Use for TO/APPR/LDG on QFE/QNH Pin Programmed Aircraft - General.
Changing the RWY or type of arrival (VOR, ILS) automatically erases the previous minimum.
Check or modify the landing configuration. Always select the landing configuration on the PERF APP page: CONF FULL in the normal landing configuration. CONF 3 should be considered, depending on the available runway length and go-around performance, or if windshear/severe turbulence is considered possible during approach. GO-AROUND page..................................................................................................... CHECK/MODIFY Check THR RED ALT and ACC ALT, and modify, if necessary.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 2/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
RAD NAV page.......................................................................................................................... CHECK Set navaids, as required, and check idents on the NDs (VOR-ADF) and PFDs (ILS). If a VOR/DME exists close to the airfield, select it and enter its ident in the BRG/DIST field of the PROG page, for NAV ACCY monitoring during descent. SEC F-PLN page................................................................................................................... AS RQRD Before the top of descent, the SEC F-PLN should either be set to an alternate runway for destination, or to the landing runway in case of circling. In all cases, routing to the alternate should be available. If there is a last-minute runway change, then the flight crew only needs to activate the secondary F-PLN, without forgetting to set the new minimum and navaids. 2 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
ARRIVAL page...................................................................................................... COMPLETE/CHECK Insert APPR, STAR, APPR VIA and TRANS if applicable. (Access by lateral revision at destination.) F-PLN A page............................................................................................................................ CHECK ‐ Ensure that the inserted F–PLN agrees with planned approach and missed approach. ‐ Use the scroll key to check the F–PLN thoroughly, using ND in PLAN mode as necessary. Tracks and distances between waypoints are displayed on the second line from the top of the MCDU. Approach and Missed Approach tracks and distances must be checked from the appropriate navigation charts. ‐ Check speed and altitude constraints. Add new speed or altitude constraints if required. ‐ In all cases, do not modify the final approach (FAF to runway or MAP), including altitude constraints. ‐ Identify the position and the altitude of Final Descent Point (FDP) and check the value of the FPA after this FDP (aircraft must be stabilized before the FDP), ‐ Identify the Missed Approach Point. DES WIND................................................................................................................................. CHECK Enter winds for descent starting at cruise flight level. PERF CRUISE page.................................................................................................................. CHECK Modify the cabin descent rate if different pressure rate is required. PERF DES page........................................................................................................................ CHECK Prior to descent, access PERF DES page and check ECON MACH/SPD. If a speed other than ECON is required, insert that MACH or SPD into the ECON field. This new MACH or SPD is now the one for the descent path and T/D computation, and it will be used for the managed speed descent profile (instead of ECON).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 3/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
A speed limit of 250 kt below 10 000 ft is the defaulted speed, in the managed speed descent profile. The flight crew may delete or modify it if necessary on the VERT REV at DEST page. PERF APPR page................................................................................................. COMPLETE/CHECK Enter the QNH, temperature, and wind at destination. Note:
The entered wind should be the average wind given by the ATC or ATIS. Do not enter gust values. For example, if the wind is 150/20-25, insert the lower speed 150/20 (ground speed mini-function will cope with the gust).
Insert the minimum. Note:
‐ To avoid undershooting the published minimum during go-around, due to aircraft inertia during pull-up, some Authorities may require Operators to add a specific number of feet to the published minimum. ‐ Changing the RWY or type of approach automatically erases the previous minimums.
Check or modify the landing configuration. Always select the landing configuration on the PERF APP page: CONF FULL in the normal landing configuration. CONF 3 should be considered, depending on the available runway length and go-around performance, or if windshear/severe turbulence is considered possible during approach. GO-AROUND page..................................................................................................... CHECK/MODIFY Check THR RED ALT and ACC ALT, and modify, if necessary. RAD NAV page.......................................................................................................................... CHECK Set navaids, as required, and check idents on the NDs (VOR-ADF) and PFDs (ILS). If a VOR/DME exists close to the airfield, select it and enter its ident in the BRG/DIST field of the PROG page, for NAV ACCY monitoring during descent. SELECTED NAVAID page.......................................................................................... CHECK/MODIFY For RNP AR approaches, deselect all NAVAIDS through the RADIONAV SELECTED/DESELECTED prompt. SEC F-PLN page................................................................................................................... AS RQRD Before the top of descent, the SEC F-PLN should either be set to an alternate runway for destination, or to the landing runway in case of circling. In all cases, routing to the alternate should be available. If there is a last-minute runway change, then the flight crew only needs to activate the secondary F-PLN, without forgetting to set the new minimum and navaids. Applicable to: ALL
GPWS LDG FLAP 3 pb-sw....................................................................................................AS RQRD If the pilot plans on landing in FLAPS 3 configuration, the GPWS LDG FLAP 3 pb-sw should be set to ON.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 4/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
Applicable to: ALL
APPROACH BRIEFING........................................................................................................ PERFORM Applicable to: ALL
AUTO BRK.............................................................................................................................AS RQRD Use of autobrake is preferable. Use of MAX mode is not recommended at landing. On short or contaminated runways, use MED mode. On long runways, LO mode is recommended. Note:
If, on very long runways, the flight crew anticipates that braking will not be needed, use of the autobrake is not necessary.
Firmly press the appropriate pushbutton, according to the runway length and condition, and check that the related ON light comes on. Applicable to: ALL
DESCENT CLEARANCE...........................................................................................................OBTAIN When clearance is obtained, set the ATC-cleared altitude (FL) on the FCU (also considering what is the safe altitude). If the lowest safe altitude is higher than the ATC-cleared altitude, check with the ATC that this constraint applies. If it is confirmed, set the FCU altitude to the safe altitude, until it is safe to go to the ATC-cleared altitude. 3 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
ANTI ICE................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD During descent, ENG ANTI ICE must be ON when icing conditions are encountered. (Refer to PRO-SUP-30 Icing Conditions) When ENG ANTI ICE is ON, the FADEC automatically controls continuous ignition and selects a higher idle thrust which gives better protection against flame-out. The IGNITION memo appears on the ECAM. ANTI ICE ON reduces the descent path angle (when the engines are at idle). The pilot can compensate for this by increasing the descent speed, or by extending up to half speedbrakes. 4 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
ANTI ICE................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD During descent, ENG ANTI ICE must be ON when icing conditions are encountered. . (Refer to PRO-SUP-30 Icing Conditions) CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 5/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
When ENG ANTI ICE is ON, the FADEC selects a higher idle thrust which gives better protection against flame-out. ANTI ICE ON reduces the descent path angle (when the engines are at idle). The pilot can compensate for this by increasing the descent speed, or by extending up to half speedbrakes.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 6/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
DESCENT INITIATION Applicable to: ALL
DESCENT................................................................................................................................ INITIATE The normal method of initiating the descent is to select DES mode at the FMGS calculated top of descent (T/D). If ATC requires an early descent: Use DES mode which will guide the aircraft down at a lower vertical speed in order to converge on the required descent path. (The pilot may use a V/S of -1 000 ft/min). If ATC delays the descent: Beyond T/D, a DECELERATE message comes up on the PFD and MCDU. This suggests to the crew that it starts reducing speed towards green dot speed (with ATC permission). When cleared to descend, select DES mode with managed speed active. DESCENT MONITORING Applicable to: ALL
PF MCDU..................................................................................................................PROG/PERF DES PF MCDU should be set to PROG or PERF DES page: ‐ PROG page in order to get VDEV or RQD DIST TO LAND/DIRECT DIST TO DEST information ‐ PERF DES in order to get predictions down to any inserted altitude in DES/OP DES modes and EXP mode . PNF MCDU...................................................................................................................................F-PLN DESCENT.............................................................................................................................. MONITOR Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60-A Descent Monitoring - DES Mode Engaged
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A to B →
PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 1/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
‐ When flying in NAV mode, use DES mode. The aircraft descends along the descent flight path: the PFD and PROG page display VDEV, and so it can be monitored. All constraints of the flight plan are taken into account for the guidance. ‐ When the aircraft is flying in HDG or TRK mode, and thus out of the lateral F-PLN, DES mode is not available. The NDs show a level-off symbol along the flight path. Its position is based on the current active modes .AP/FD and A/THR The flight crew can use this symbol to monitor the descent. MCDU predictions assume a return to the lateral F-PLN and descent flight path. Note that whenever the lateral mode is changed from NAV to HDG/TRK the vertical mode reverts to V/S at the value pertaining at the time of the mode change. ‐ From time to time during stabilized descent, the flight crew may select FPA to check that the remaining distance to destination is approximately the altitude change required divided by the FPA in degrees. FPA (°) = ΔFL/DIST (NM)
DESCENT ADJUSTMENT Applicable to: ALL
To increase the rate of descent: ‐ Increase descent speed (by use of selected speed) if comfort and ATC permit. It is economically better (Time/Fuel) than the following procedures. ‐ Maintain high speed as long as possible. (SPD LIM may be suspended, subject to ATC clearance). ‐ If the aircraft is high and at high speed, it is more efficient to keep the high speed to ALT* knob and decelerate, rather than to mix descent and deceleration. ‐ If the aircraft goes below the desired profile, use SPEED and the V/S knob mode to adjust the rate of descent. Note:
EXPEDITE DESCENT. If a high rate of descent is required, push the EXPED pushbutton on the FCU. The target speed for the descent now becomes M 0.8 or 340 kt, whichever is lower. The FMA will display THRIDLE/EXP DES/NAV. To return to DES mode, push the FCU ALT knob. To return to SPEED/V/S modes, pull the FCU V/S knob. In all cases, monitor the FMA to ensure that the mode engages properly.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to C →
PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 2/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
Applicable to: ALL
SPEED BRAKE lever.............................................................................................................AS RQRD If engine anti-ice is selected in descent, the flight idle is increased. So, to maintain the rate of descent that the airplane had before engine anti-ice selection it may be necessary to use up to half speedbrakes to maintain the required rate of descent, in OPEN DES vertical mode. If the rate of descent has to be increased, full speedbrakes may be used. In DES mode: If the aircraft is on, or below, the flight path and the ATC requires a higher rate of descent, do not use speedbrakes because the rate of descent is dictated by the planned flight path. Thus, the A/THR may increase thrust to compensate for the increase in drag. In this case, use OPEN DES with speedbrakes. Note:
1. If speedbrakes are used above 315 kt/M .75, with the AP engaged, their rate of retraction is low (total time for retraction from full extension is approximately 25 s). The ECAM memo page displays SPD BRAKES in amber until retraction is complete. 2. In order to avoid overshooting the altitude, due to speedbrake retraction in ALT* mode, retract the speedbrakes at least 2 000 ft before the selected altitude.
Applicable to: ALL Impacted by TDU: 00013353 Descent Adjustment - Radar Impacted by TDU: 00013353 Descent Adjustment - Radar
RADAR knob........................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE 1 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210,
B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006 Impacted DU: 00011545 Descent Adjustment - Radar
RADAR knob........................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 200. Note:
1. If the weather is good, or no significant, in order to check that the radar is operating correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes. 2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique. 3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground clutter appears on the upper part of the display. 4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 3/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
2 Applicable to: B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417
Impacted DU: 00011545 Descent Adjustment - Radar
RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +8 when, MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 150. Note:
1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on the ND’s. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily MANUAL TILT. 2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard techniques.
Applicable to: ALL
BARO REF.......................................................................................................................................SET Set QNH (or QFE) on the EFIS control panel and on the standby altimeter, when approaching the transition level and when cleared for an altitude. Crosscheck BARO settings and altitude readings. Note:
When operating in low OAT, altitude corrections, as defined in Refer to PER-OPD-GEN ALTITUDE TEMPERATURE CORRECTION, should be considered.
Applicable to: ALL
TERR ON ND .................................................................................................................AS RQRD ‐ In mountainous areas, consider displaying terrain on ND. ‐ If use of radar is required, consider selecting the radar display on the PF side, and TERR ON ND on the PNF side only. Applicable to: ALL
ECAM STATUS..........................................................................................................................CHECK ‐ Check that there is no status reminder on the upper ECAM display. ‐ If there is a status reminder, check the aircraft STATUS. ‐ Check the ECAM status page before completing the approach checks. Take particular note of any degradation in landing capability, or any other aspect affecting the approach and landing. Applicable to: ALL
AT 10 000 FT LAND lights....................................................................................................................................ON LAND lights may be switched ON, according to the airline policy/regulatory recommendations. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 4/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
SEAT BELTS sw................................................................................................................AS RQRD EFIS option................................................................................................................................CSTR Select CSTR on both sides. LS pushbutton.................................................................................................................... AS RQRD Select LS, if an ILS or LOC approach is intended. The PFD displays the LOC and glide scales and deviation symbol, if there is a valid ILS signal. RAD NAVAIDS............................................................................................SELECTED/IDENTIFIED Ensure that appropriate radio NAVAIDS are tuned and identified. For NDB approaches, manually select the reference NAVAID. NAV ACCURACY................................................................................................................... CHECK On aircraft equipped with GPS primary, no navigation accuracy check is required, as long as GPS PRIMARY function is available. Otherwise, crosscheck NAV ACCURACY using the PROG page (BRG/DIST computed data), and the ND (VOR/DME raw data).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C
PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 5/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 6/6 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
INITIAL APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
For more information about precision approaches and how to use the FMGS, Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70-A ILS/MLS/GLS Approach - Intermediate/Final Approach. The approach procedures described here assume that the flight crew uses managed speed guidance which is recommended. Applicable to: ALL Impacted by TDU: 00013098 Initial Approach - Initial Approach Impacted by TDU: 00013098 Initial Approach - Initial Approach
ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or if heavy rain or severe turbulence is expected during approach or go-around. SEAT BELTS sw.................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO APPROACH PHASE................................................................................................CHECK/ACTIVATE ‐ If the aircraft overflies the DECEL pseudo waypoint in NAV mode, the APPR phase activates automatically ‐ If the aircraft is in HDG/TRK mode, approximately 15 nm from touchdown activate and confirm APPROACH phase on the MCDU. POSITIONING........................................................................................................................MONITOR ‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, use the energy circle on ND representing the required distance to land. MANAGED SPEED.................................................................................................................... CHECK If ATC requires a particular speed, then use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint (“maintain 170 kt to the outer marker”, for example) no longer applies, return to managed speed. SPEED BRAKES lever...........................................................................................................AS RQRD If the pilot uses speed brakes to increase the rate of deceleration, or to increase the rate of descent, it is important to note that VLS with speed brakes fully extended, in the clean configuration, may be higher than green dot speed and possibly than VFE FLAP 1. The A/THR in speed mode, or the pitch demand in OPEN DES, will limit the speed to VLS. In this situation, the pilot should begin to retract speed brakes upon reaching VLS. + 5 kt and should select FLAP 1, as soon as speed is below VFE NEXT. The speed brakes may then be extended, if necessary. The landing gear may always be extended out of sequence to facilitate deceleration. RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 1/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
1 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210,
B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006 Impacted DU: 00011573 Initial Approach - Initial Approach
ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or if heavy rain or severe turbulence is expected during approach or go-around. SEAT BELTS sw.................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO APPROACH PHASE................................................................................................CHECK/ACTIVATE ‐ If the aircraft overflies the DECEL pseudo waypoint in NAV mode, the APPR phase activates automatically ‐ If the aircraft is in HDG/TRK mode, approximately 15 nm from touchdown activate and confirm APPROACH phase on the MCDU. POSITIONING........................................................................................................................MONITOR ‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, use the energy circle on ND representing the required distance to land. MANAGED SPEED.................................................................................................................... CHECK If ATC requires a particular speed, then use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint (“maintain 170 kt to the outer marker”, for example) no longer applies, return to managed speed. SPEED BRAKES lever...........................................................................................................AS RQRD If the pilot uses speed brakes to increase the rate of deceleration, or to increase the rate of descent, it is important to note that VLS with speed brakes fully extended, in the clean configuration, may be higher than green dot speed and possibly than VFE FLAP 1. The A/THR in speed mode, or the pitch demand in OPEN DES, will limit the speed to VLS. In this situation, the pilot should begin to retract speed brakes upon reaching VLS. + 5 kt and should select FLAP 1, as soon as speed is below VFE NEXT. The speed brakes may then be extended, if necessary. The landing gear may always be extended out of sequence to facilitate deceleration. RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 200.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 2/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
1. If the weather is good, or no significant, in order to check that the radar is operating correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes. 2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique. 3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground clutter appears on the upper part of the display. 4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
2 Applicable to: B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417
Impacted DU: 00011573 Initial Approach - Initial Approach
ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or if heavy rain or severe turbulence is expected during approach or go-around. SEAT BELTS sw.................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO APPROACH PHASE................................................................................................CHECK/ACTIVATE ‐ If the aircraft overflies the DECEL pseudo waypoint in NAV mode, the APPR phase activates automatically ‐ If the aircraft is in HDG/TRK mode, approximately 15 nm from touchdown activate and confirm APPROACH phase on the MCDU. POSITIONING........................................................................................................................MONITOR ‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, use the energy circle on ND representing the required distance to land. MANAGED SPEED.................................................................................................................... CHECK If ATC requires a particular speed, then use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint (“maintain 170 kt to the outer marker”, for example) no longer applies, return to managed speed. SPEED BRAKES lever...........................................................................................................AS RQRD If the pilot uses speed brakes to increase the rate of deceleration, or to increase the rate of descent, it is important to note that VLS with speed brakes fully extended, in the clean configuration, may be higher than green dot speed and possibly than VFE FLAP 1. The A/THR in speed mode, or the pitch demand in OPEN DES, will limit the speed to VLS. In this situation, the pilot should begin to retract speed brakes upon reaching VLS. + 5 kt and should select FLAP 1, as soon as speed is below VFE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 3/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
NEXT. The speed brakes may then be extended, if necessary. The landing gear may always be extended out of sequence to facilitate deceleration. RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +8 when, MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 150. Note:
1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on the ND’s. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily MANUAL TILT. 2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard techniques.
Applicable to: ALL 3
NAV ACCURACY...................................................................................................................MONITOR When GPS PRIMARY is available, no NAV ACCURACY monitoring is required. When GPS PRIMARY is lost, check the PROG page to verify that the required navigation accuracy is appropriate to the flight phase. Monitor NAV accuracy, and be prepared to change approach strategy. If NAV ACCURACY DOWNGRAD occurs, use raw data to crosscheck navigation accuracy. Navigation accuracy determines which autopilot modes the flight crew should use, and the type of displays to be shown on the ND. NAVIGATION ACCURACY GPS PRIMARY NAV ACCUR HIGH NAV ACCUR LOW and NAV ACCURACY check ≤ 1 nm GPS PRIMARY LOST and NAV ACCUR LOW and NAV ACCURACY check > 1 nm GPS PRIMARY LOST and Aircraft flying within unreliable radio NAVAID area
PF
ND
AP/FD mode
PNF
ARC or ROSE NAV with NAVAID raw data
NAV
ARC or ROSE NAV or ROSE LS with NAVAID raw data
ROSE LS
HDG or TRK
Applicable to: ALL
APPROACH CHECKLIST................................................................................................... COMPLETE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 4/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
INTERMEDIATE/FINAL APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
The objective is to be stabilized on the final descent path at VAPP in the landing configuration, at 1 000 ft above airfield elevation (in instrument conditions, or at 500 ft above airfield elevation in visual conditions, after continuous deceleration on the glide slope). To be stabilized, all of the following conditions must be achieved prior to, or upon reaching this stabilization height: ‐ The aircraft is on the correct lateral and vertical flight path ‐ The aircraft is in the desired landing configuration ‐ The thrust is stabilized, usually above idle, to maintain the target approach speed along the desired glide path ‐ No excessive flight parameter deviation. If the aircraft is not stabilized on the approach path in landing configuration, at 1 000 ft above airfield elevation in instrument conditions, or at 500 ft above airfield elevation in visual conditions, or as restricted by Operator policy/regulations, the flight crew must initiate a go-around, unless they think that only small corrections are necessary to rectify minor deviations from stabilized conditions due, amongst others, to external perturbations. APPR pb on FCU....................................................................................................................... PRESS ‐ Press the APPR pb, only when ATC cleares the aircraft for the approach. This arms the LOC and G/S modes ‐ LOC and/or G/S capture modes will engage no sooner than 3 s after being armed. BOTH APs............................................................................................................................... ENGAGE When APPR mode is selected, AP1 pb and AP2 pb should be engaged. AT GREEN DOT SPEED FLAPS 1.................................................................................................................................ORDER FLAPS 1................................................................................................................................SELECT FLAPS 1 should be selected more than 3 nm before the FAF (Final Approach Fix). Note:
The ECAM automatically displays the STATUS page, if it is applicable, and if the flight crew has not already selected a system page manually.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 5/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
‐ Check deceleration toward “S” speed ‐ The aircraft must reach, or be established on, the glideslope with FLAPS 1 and S speed at, or above, 2 000 ft AGL. ‐ If the aircraft speed is significantly higher than S on the glideslope, or if the aircraft does not decelerate on the glideslope, extend the landing gear to slow it down. It is also possible to use speed brakes. However, the flight crew should be aware that the use of speed brakes causes an increase in VLS. TCAS ......................................................................................................................TA or TA/RA The FAA recommends selecting TA only mode: ‐ In case of known nearby traffic, which is in visual contact ‐ At particular airports, and during particular procedures, identified by an Operator as having a significant potential for unwanted or inappropriate resolution advisories (closely-spaced parallel runways, converging runway, low terrain along the final approach...). FMA........................................................................................................... CHECK and ANNOUNCE LOC CAPTURE..................................................................................................................MONITOR The flight crew must always monitor the capture of LOC beam. During the capture phase, the associated deviation indications on the PFD and ND must indicate movement towards the center of the scale. G/S CAPTURE...................................................................................................................MONITOR If above the glideslope: FCU ALTITUDE............................................................................. SET ABOVE A/C ALTITUDE V/S mode........................................................................................................................SELECT Note:
1. When reaching VFE, the AP maintains VFE and reduces the V/S without MODE REVERSION. 2. If the aircraft intercepts the ILS above the radio altimeter validity range (no radio altitude indication available on the PFD), CAT 1 is displayed on the FMA. Check that the FMA displays the correct capability for the intended approach, when the aircraft is below 5 000 ft.
GO-AROUND ALT....................................................................................................................... SET Set the go around altitude on the FCU. AT 2 000 FT AGL (MINIMUM) FLAPS 2.................................................................................................................................ORDER
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 6/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
FLAPS 2................................................................................................................................SELECT ‐ Check deceleration towards F speed ‐ If the aircraft intercepts the ILS glideslope below 2 000 ft AGL, select FLAPS 2 at one dot below the glideslope ‐ If the aircraft speed is significantly higher than S on the glide slope, extend the landing gear in order to slow down the aircraft. The use of speed brakes is not recommended ‐ When the speed brakes are deployed, extending the flaps beyond FLAPS 1 may induce a slight roll movement, and in calm conditions a small lateral control asymmetry may remain until disturbed by a control input or by an atmospheric disturbance. WHEN FLAPS ARE AT 2 LDG GEAR DOWN................................................................................................................ORDER L/G lever...................................................................................................................SELECT DOWN AUTO BRK......................................................................................................................... CONFIRM If the runway conditions have changed from the approach briefing, consider another braking mode. GROUND SPOILERS................................................................................................................. ARM EXTERIOR LIGHTS.....................................................................................................................SET Set: ‐ The NOSE selector to TAXI ‐ The RWY TURN OFF sw to ON WHEN LANDING GEAR IS DOWN FLAPS 3.................................................................................................................................ORDER FLAPS 3................................................................................................................................SELECT Select FLAPS 3 below VFE next. WHEEL SD page .................................................................................................................. CHECK • WHEEL SD page appears below 800 ft, or at landing gear extension. • Check for three green indications on the landing gear indicator panel. At least one green triangle on each landing gear strut on the WHEEL SD page is sufficient to indicate that the landing gear is downlocked. Rely also on the “LDG GEAR DN” green LDG MEMO message to confirm that the landing gear is downlocked. If residual pressure is indicated on the triple indicator: RESIDUAL BRAKING PROC........................................................................................... APPLY
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 7/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
Due to the accomplishment of the alternate braking functional test after the landing is downlocked, brief brake pressure indications may be observed on BRAKE PRESS indicator.
FLAPS FULL.......................................................................................................................... ORDER FLAPS FULL......................................................................................................................... SELECT Select FLAPS FULL below VFE next. Retract the speed brakes before selecting FLAPS FULL to avoid an unexpected pitch down, when the speed brakes retract automatically. Check deceleration towards VAPP. 4
A/THR............................................................................................CHECK IN SPEED MODE OR OFF WING ANTI-ICE...............................................................................................................................OFF Only switch the WING ANTI ICE to ON, in severe icing conditions. SLIDING TABLE ...................................................................................................................STOW LDG MEMO..................................................................................................... CHECK NO BLUE LINE CABIN REPORT........................................................................................................................OBTAIN CABIN CREW............................................................................................................................ADVISE LANDING CHECK LIST......................................................................................................COMPLETE FLIGHT PARAMETERS............................................................................................................. CHECK The PF announces any FMA modification. The PNF calls out, if: ‐ The speed becomes less than the speed target -5 kt , or greater than the speed target +10 kt ‐ The pitch attitude becomes less than -2.5 °, or greater than 10 ° nose up ‐ The bank angle becomes greater than 7 ° ‐ The descent rate becomes greater than 1 000 ft/min ‐ Excessive LOC or GLIDE deviation occurs. 1/4 dot LOC; 1 dot GS Following PNF flight parameter exceedance callout, the suitable PF response will be: ‐ Acknowledge the PNF callout, for proper crew coordination purposes ‐ Take immediate corrective action to control the exceeded parameter back into the defined stabilized conditions ‐ Assess whether stabilized conditions will be recovered early enough prior to landing, otherwise initiate a go-around. AT MINIMUM + 100 FT : ONE HUNDRED ABOVE.......................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 8/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
AT MINIMUM : MINIMUM...............................................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE CONTINUE OR GO AROUND.......................................................................................ANNOUNCE Do not duck under the glideslope. Maintain a stabilized flight path down to the flare. At 50 ft, one dot below the glideslope is 7 ft below the glideslope. PRECISION APPROACH PATTERN Applicable to: ALL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to C
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 9/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PRECISION APPROACH
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-18 P 10/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
INTRODUCTION Applicable to: ALL
GUIDANCE FOR NON PRECISION APPROACHES, OTHER THAN LOC, LOC B\C AND RNAV NON PRECISION APPROACHES Three different approach strategies are available to perform non-precision approaches: 1. Lateral and vertical guidance, selected by the crew: TRK-FPA (or HDG-V/S) modes. 2. Lateral guidance, managed by the FM, and vertical guidance selected by the crew: NAV-FPA (or NAV-V/S) modes. 3. Lateral and vertical guidance, managed by the FM: FINAL APP mode. For straight in approaches, the recommended flying reference is FPV, which should be selected during the initial approach.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 1/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
‐ Approach procedures including a PI-CF leg (PROC-T indicated on the MCDU F-PLN) are not eligible for the use of NAV and FINAL APP modes. ‐ Lateral managed guidance (NAV) can be used, provided the approach is stored in the navigation database and the final approach is laterally and vertically monitored, using the adequate raw data (reference NAVAID, altimeter). Lateral and vertical managed guidance (FINAL APP) in IMC conditions can be used, provided the following conditions are met: • The approach stored in the navigation database has been produced by approved suppliers compliant with ED76/DO200A requirements, or has been validated and approved by the operator. • The effect of low OAT on obstacle clearance needs to be evaluated. A minimum OAT, below which selected vertical guidance should be used, may have to be defined. • The final approach (FAF to runway or MAP), as extracted from the navigation database and inserted in the primary F-PLN including altitude constraints, is not revised by the crew. • Before starting the approach, the crew must check the lateral and the vertical FM F-PLN against the published approach chart, using the MCDU and ND. • The approach trajectory is laterally and vertically intercepted, before the FAF, or equivalent waypoint in the FM F-PLN, so that the aircraft is correctly established on the final approach course before starting the descent. • Conventional radio NAVAIDs must be available and monitored during the approach, and must be considered with altitude as the primary means of navigation. Note:
For additional information on recommended flight crew procedures, and on navigation database vertical flight path validation, Refer to FCB-FCB23 Use of Managed Guidance in Approach and NAV Database Validation and the FMGS Pilot's Guide (Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 Initial Approach).
If the FM/GPS POS DISAGREE ECAM caution is triggered during the approach, use selected guidance to continue the approach with radio NAVAID raw data. If GPS PRIMARY is lost, NAV and FINAL APP mode can be used to continue the approach, provided the radio NAVAID raw date indicates the correct navigation. Applicable to: B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6400, B-6405
GUIDANCE FOR RNAV APPROACHES Two different approach strategies are available to perform RNAV approaches: 1. Lateral guidance, managed by the FM, and vertical guidance selected by the crew: NAV-FPA (or NAV-V/S) modes. This strategy applies, when LNAV ONLY (Lateral Navigation only) RNAV approach is intended. 2. Lateral and vertical guidance, managed by the FM: FINAL APP mode. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 2/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
This strategy applies, when LNAV/VNAV (Lateral and Vertical Navigation) RNAV approach is intended. For straight in approaches, the recommended flying reference is FPV, which should be selected during the initial approach. Before starting a RNAV (GPS) approach, two navigation systems must be operative: 2 FMS and 2 GPS. RNAV approach can be performed in NAV-FPA (or NAV-V/S) modes provided: ‐ The approach stored in the navigation database has been produced by approved suppliers compliant with ED76/DO200A requirements, or has been validated and is approved by the operator. ‐ Before starting the approach, the crew must check the lateral FM F-PLN against the published approach chart using MCDU and ND. ‐ The final approach is laterally and vertically monitored, using the appropriate data: the distance to the runway or to the MAP versus altitude is the primary means of vertical navigation, the deviation on the PFD may be unreliable. RNAV approach can be performed in FINAL APP mode provided: ‐ The approach stored in the navigation database has been produced by approved suppliers compliant with ED76/DO200A requirements, and the vertical flight path has been validated by the operator, or, the lateral and vertical flight path has been validated and approved by the operator. If no minimum OAT is published on the approach chart, the effect of low OAT on obstacle clearance needs to be evaluated. ‐ The final approach (FAF to runway or MAP), as extracted from the navigation database and inserted in the primary F-PLN including altitude constraints, is not revised by the crew. ‐ Before starting the approach, the crew must check the lateral and the vertical FM F-PLN against the published approach chart, using the MCDU and ND. ‐ The approach trajectory is laterally and vertically intercepted, before the FAF, or equivalent waypoint in the FM F-PLN, so that the aircraft is correctly established on the final approach course before starting the descent. ‐ The final approach is laterally and vertically monitored, using the VDEV and appropriate raw data (distance to the runway, altitude, FPV). Note:
For additional information on recommended flight crew procedures, and on navigation database flight path validation: Refer to FCB-FCB23 Use of Managed Guidance in Approach and NAV Database Validation and the FMGS Pilot's guide (Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 Initial Approach).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 3/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
For RNAV approach WITH GPS PRIMARY Unless an instrument approach procedure, not requiring GPS PRIMARY, is available at destination or destination alternate (and at required takeoff alternate, and en route alternate), the GPS PRIMARY availability must be verified before flight. AIME is available worldwide, if 24 GPS satellites or more are operative. If the number of GPS satellites is 23 or less, check AIME availability using the approved version of the Litton ground-based AIME prediction software. Before starting the approach, check that GPS PRIMARY is available on both MCDUs. If the GPS PRIMARY LOST indication appears on the ND during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless: ‐ GPS is not required and navigation accuracy is confirmed against the radio NAVAID raw data, or ‐ For RNAV approach not requiring GPS, HIGH accuracy appears on the MCDU with the appropriate RNP value. ‐ If GPS PRIMARY is lost on only one FMGC, the approach can be continued, using the AP/FD associated to the other FMGC. If the FM/GPS POS DISAGREE ECAM caution is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach. If the FMS1/FMS2 POS DIFF message is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless radio NAVAID raw data is available and indicates correct navigation to continue the approach by using the AP/FD associated to the non-affected FMGC side. For RNAV approach WITHOUT GPS PRIMARY Before starting the approach, check the FM position accuracy with radio NAVAID raw data. Check, in addition, that HIGH accuracy appears on the MCDU with the specified RNP value. If HIGH accuracy is lost on one FMGC, the approach can be continued with the AP/FD associated to the other FMGC. If HIGH accuracy is lost on both FMGCs, discontinue the approach. If the FMS1/FMS2 POS DIFF message is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless radio NAVAID raw data is available and indicates correct navigation to continue the approach by using the AP/FD associated to the non-affected FMGC side. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222
GUIDANCE FOR RNAV APPROACHES Two different approach strategies are available to perform RNAV approaches: 1. Lateral guidance, managed by the FM, and vertical guidance selected by the crew: NAV-FPA (or NAV-V/S) modes. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 4/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
This strategy applies, when LNAV ONLY (Lateral Navigation only) RNAV approach is intended. 2. Lateral and vertical guidance, managed by the FM: FINAL APP mode. This strategy applies, when LNAV/VNAV (Lateral and Vertical Navigation) RNAV approach is intended. For straight in approaches, the recommended flying reference is FPV, which should be selected during the initial approach. Before starting a RNAV (GPS) approach, two navigation systems must be operative: 2 FMS and 2 GPS. RNAV approach can be performed in NAV-FPA (or NAV-V/S) modes provided: ‐ The approach stored in the navigation database has been produced by approved suppliers compliant with ED76/DO200A requirements, or has been validated and is approved by the operator. ‐ Before starting the approach, the crew must check the lateral FM F-PLN against the published approach chart using MCDU and ND. ‐ The final approach is laterally and vertically monitored, using the appropriate data: the distance to the runway or to the MAP versus altitude is the primary means of vertical navigation, the deviation on the PFD may be unreliable. RNAV approach can be performed in FINAL APP mode provided: ‐ The approach stored in the navigation database has been produced by approved suppliers compliant with ED76/DO200A requirements, and the vertical flight path has been validated by the operator, or, the lateral and vertical flight path has been validated and approved by the operator. If no minimum OAT is published on the approach chart, the effect of low OAT on obstacle clearance needs to be evaluated. ‐ The final approach (FAF to runway or MAP), as extracted from the navigation database and inserted in the primary F-PLN including altitude constraints, is not revised by the crew. ‐ Before starting the approach, the crew must check the lateral and the vertical FM F-PLN against the published approach chart, using the MCDU and ND. ‐ The approach trajectory is laterally and vertically intercepted, before the FAF, or equivalent waypoint in the FM F-PLN, so that the aircraft is correctly established on the final approach course before starting the descent. ‐ The final approach is laterally and vertically monitored, using the VDEV and appropriate raw data (distance to the runway, altitude, FPV). Note:
For additional information on recommended flight crew procedures, and on navigation database flight path validation: Refer to FCB-FCB23 Use of Managed Guidance in Approach and NAV Database Validation and the FMGS Pilot's guide (Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 Initial Approach).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 5/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
For RNAV approach WITH GPS PRIMARY Unless an instrument approach procedure, not requiring GPS PRIMARY, is available at destination or destination alternate (and at required takeoff alternate, and en route alternate), the GPS PRIMARY availability must be verified before flight. AIME is available worldwide, if 24 GPS satellites or more are operative. If the number of GPS satellites is 23 or less, check AIME availability using the approved version of the Litton ground-based AIME prediction software. Before starting the approach, check that GPS PRIMARY is available on both MCDUs. If the GPS PRIMARY LOST indication appears on the ND during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless: ‐ GPS is not required and navigation accuracy is confirmed against the radio NAVAID raw data, or ‐ For RNAV approach not requiring GPS, HIGH accuracy appears on the MCDU with the appropriate RNP value. ‐ If GPS PRIMARY is lost on only one FMGC, the approach can be continued, using the AP/FD associated to the other FMGC. If the FM/GPS POS DISAGREE ECAM caution is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach. If the FMS1/FMS2 POS DIFF message is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless radio NAVAID raw data is available and indicates correct navigation to continue the approach by using the AP/FD associated to the non-affected FMGC side. For RNAV approach WITHOUT GPS PRIMARY Before starting the approach, check the FM position accuracy with radio NAVAID raw data. Check, in addition, that HIGH accuracy appears on the MCDU with the specified RNP value. If HIGH accuracy is lost on one FMGC, the approach can be continued with the AP/FD associated to the other FMGC. If HIGH accuracy is lost on both FMGCs, discontinue the approach. If the FMS1/FMS2 POS DIFF message is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless radio NAVAID raw data is available and indicates correct navigation to continue the approach by using the AP/FD associated to the non-affected FMGC side. 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727,
B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
Two different approach strategies are available to perform RNAV approaches 1. Lateral guidance, managed by the FM, and vertical guidance selected by the crew : NAV-FPA (or NAV-V/S) modes. This strategy applies, when LNAV ONLY (Lateral Navigation only) RNAV approach is intended. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 6/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
Not applicable to RNP AR.
2. Lateral and vertical guidance, managed by the FM : FINAL APP mode. This strategy applies, when LNAV/VNAV (Lateral and Vertical Navigation) RNAV approach is intended. For straight in approaches, the recommended flying reference is FPV, which should be selected during the initial approach. Before starting a RNAV (GPS) approach, two navigation systems must be operative : 2 FMS and 2 GPS. Before using a RNAV approach, the operator must ensure that approved suppliers compliant with ED76/D0200A requirements have produced the navigation database. Otherwise, the operator must validate and approve the approach. For RNP AR approaches, as per ACD, the operator must validate and approve the approaches even if the navigation database provider is ED76/D0200A compliant. To perform a RNAV approach in NAV-FPA (NAV-V/S) mode, the following recommendations apply: ‐ Before starting the approach, the flight crew must check the lateral FMS F-PLN against the published approach chart using MCDU and ND. ‐ The flight crew must laterally and vertically monitor the approach, using the distance to the runway or to the MAP versus altitude. To perform a RNAV approach in FINAL APP mode, the following recommendations apply: ‐ If no minimum OAT is published on the approach chart, the operator must evaluate the effect of low OAT on obstacle clearance. ‐ The flight crew must not revise the final approach (FAF to runway or MAP), which was extracted from the navigation database. ‐ Before starting the approach, the flight crew must check the lateral and the vertical FMS F-PLN against the published approach chart using MCDU and ND. ‐ The aircraft must laterally and vertically intercept the approach trajectory before the FAF, so that the aircraft is correctly established on the final approach course before starting the descent. ‐ The flight crew must monitor laterally and vertically the approach, using the VDEV and the distance to the runway or to the MAP versus altitude. Note:
For additional information on recommended flight crew procedures, and on navigation database flight path validation, Refer to "Use of managed guidance in approach and Nav database validation" and the Refer to FMGS Pilot's guide.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 7/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
For RNAV approach WITH GPS PRIMARY Unless an instrument approach procedure, not requiring GPS PRIMARY, is available at destination or destination alternate (and at required takeoff alternate, and en route alternate), the GPS PRIMARY availability must be verified before flight. RAIM is available worldwide, if 24 or more GPS satellites are operative. If the number of GPS satellites is 23 or less, check RAIM availability, using the approved version of the Honeywell ground-based prediction software. If the GPS PRIMARY availability cannot be verified before flight, RAIM availability can be checked in flight, using the PREDICTIVE GPS MCDU page Note:
For RNP AR, before flight, the flight crew must check that the GPS Primary is predicted available, for the ETA. This prediction should take into account the terrain environment.
Before starting the approach, check that GPS PRIMARY is available on both MCDUs. If the GPS PRIMARY LOST indication appears on the ND during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless: ‐ GPS is not required and navigation accuracy is confirmed against the radio NAVAID raw data, or ‐ For RNAV approach not requiring GPS, HIGH accuracy appears on the MCDU with the appropriate RNP value. ‐ If GPS PRIMARY is lost on only one FMGC, the approach can be continued, using the AP/FD associated to the other FMGC. If the FM/GPS POS DISAGREE ECAM caution is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach. If the FMS1/FMS2 POS DIFF message is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless radio NAVAID raw data is available and indicates correct navigation to continue the approach by using the AP/FD associated to the non-affected FMGC side. For RNAV approach WITHOUT GPS PRIMARY (Not applicable for RNP AR) Before starting the approach, check the FM position accuracy with radio NAVAID raw data. Check, in addition, that HIGH accuracy appears on the MCDU with the specified RNP value. If HIGH accuracy is lost on one FMGC, the approach can be continued with the AP/FD associated to the other FMGC. If HIGH accuracy is lost on both FMGCs, discontinue the approach. If the FMS1/FMS2 POS DIFF message is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless radio NAVAID raw data is available and indicates correct navigation to continue the approach by using the AP/FD associated to the non-affected FMGC side.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 8/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
Applicable to: B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417
Two different approach strategies are available to perform RNAV approaches 1. Lateral guidance, managed by the FM, and vertical guidance selected by the crew : NAV-FPA (or NAV-V/S) modes. This strategy applies, when LNAV ONLY (Lateral Navigation only) RNAV approach is intended. Note:
Not applicable to RNP AR.
2. Lateral and vertical guidance, managed by the FM : FINAL APP mode. This strategy applies, when LNAV/VNAV (Lateral and Vertical Navigation) RNAV approach is intended. For straight in approaches, the recommended flying reference is FPV, which should be selected during the initial approach. Before starting a RNAV (GPS) approach, two navigation systems must be operative : 2 FMS and 2 GPS. Before using a RNAV approach, the operator must ensure that approved suppliers compliant with ED76/D0200A requirements have produced the navigation database. Otherwise, the operator must validate and approve the approach. For RNP AR approaches, as per ACD, the operator must validate and approve the approaches even if the navigation database provider is ED76/D0200A compliant. To perform a RNAV approach in NAV-FPA (NAV-V/S) mode, the following recommendations apply: ‐ Before starting the approach, the flight crew must check the lateral FMS F-PLN against the published approach chart using MCDU and ND. ‐ The flight crew must laterally and vertically monitor the approach, using the distance to the runway or to the MAP versus altitude. To perform a RNAV approach in FINAL APP mode, the following recommendations apply: ‐ If no minimum OAT is published on the approach chart, the operator must evaluate the effect of low OAT on obstacle clearance. ‐ The flight crew must not revise the final approach (FAF to runway or MAP), which was extracted from the navigation database. ‐ Before starting the approach, the flight crew must check the lateral and the vertical FMS F-PLN against the published approach chart using MCDU and ND. ‐ The aircraft must laterally and vertically intercept the approach trajectory before the FAF, so that the aircraft is correctly established on the final approach course before starting the descent. ‐ The flight crew must monitor laterally and vertically the approach, using the VDEV and the distance to the runway or to the MAP versus altitude.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 9/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
For additional information on recommended flight crew procedures, and on navigation database flight path validation, Refer to "Use of managed guidance in approach and Nav database validation" and the Refer to FMGS Pilot's guide.
For RNAV approach WITH GPS PRIMARY Unless an instrument approach procedure, not requiring GPS PRIMARY, is available at destination or destination alternate (and at required takeoff alternate, and enroute alternate), the GPS PRIMARY availability must be verified before flight. AIME is available worldwide, if 24 GPS satellites or more are operative. If the number of GPS satellites is 23 or less, check AIME availability using the approved version of the Litton ground-based AIME prediction software. Note:
For RNP AR, before flight, the flight crew must check that the GPS Primary is predicted available, for the ETA. This prediction should take into account the terrain environment.
Before starting the approach, check that GPS PRIMARY is available on both MCDUs. If the GPS PRIMARY LOST indication appears on the ND during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless: ‐ GPS is not required and navigation accuracy is confirmed against the radio NAVAID raw data, or ‐ For RNAV approach not requiring GPS, HIGH accuracy appears on the MCDU with the appropriate RNP value. ‐ If GPS PRIMARY is lost on only one FMGC, the approach can be continued, using the AP/FD associated to the other FMGC. If the FM/GPS POS DISAGREE ECAM caution is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach. If the FMS1/FMS2 POS DIFF message is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless radio NAVAID raw data is available and indicates correct navigation to continue the approach by using the AP/FD associated to the non-affected FMGC side. For RNAV approach WITHOUT GPS PRIMARY Before starting the approach, check the FM position accuracy with radio NAVAID raw data. Check, in addition, that HIGH accuracy appears on the MCDU with the specified RNP value. If HIGH accuracy is lost on one FMGC, the approach can be continued with the AP/FD associated to the other FMGC. If HIGH accuracy is lost on both FMGCs, discontinue the approach.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 10/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
If the FMS1/FMS2 POS DIFF message is triggered during the approach, discontinue the approach, unless radio NAVAID raw data is available and indicates correct navigation to continue the approach by using the AP/FD associated to the non-affected FMGC side. Applicable to: ALL
GUIDANCE FOR LOC NON PRECISION APPROACHES The Standard Operating Procedure of this section can be used for flying LOC or LOC B/C approaches, provided the following approach guidance items are observed. The FM NAV mode can be used down to LOC or LOC B/C interception. For LOC intermediate and final approach, use the LOC or AP/FD mode for lateral navigation, associated with the FPA (or V/S) for vertical navigation. For LOC B/C intermediate and final approach, do not use LOC mode as it would give reverse deviation. Intercept the LOC B/C manually using TRK/FPA modes. Monitor the interception on the ND in ROSE LS mode. Vertical navigation must be monitored using raw data (altimeter, distance to the runway given by radio-NAVAID). Applicable to: ALL
APPROACH SPEED TECHNIQUE In all cases, the crew should use managed speed. The standard speed technique is to make a stabilized approach using AP/FD and A/THR: The aircraft intercepts the final descent path in landing configuration, and at VAPP. For this purpose, the flight crew should insert VAPP as a speed constraint at the FAF. If the operator adopts a decelerated approach technique and the crew uses managed guidance, the aircraft should intercept the final descent path at S speed in CONF 1. The objective is to be stabilized on the final descent path at VAPP in the landing configuration, at 1 000 ft above airfield elevation (in instrument conditions, or at 500 ft above airfield elevation in visual conditions, after continuous deceleration on the final descent path). To be stabilized, all of the following conditions must be achieved prior to, or upon reaching this stabilization height: ‐ The aircraft is on the correct lateral and vertical flight path ‐ The aircraft is in the desired landing configuration ‐ The thrust is stabilized, usually above idle, to maintain the target approach speed along the desired final approach path ‐ No excessive flight parameter deviation. If the aircraft is not stabilized on the approach path in landing configuration, at 1 000 ft above airfield elevation in instrument conditions, or at 500 ft above airfield elevation in visual conditions, or as restricted by Operator policy/regulations, the flight crew must initiate a go-around, unless CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 11/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
they think that only small corrections are necessary to rectify minor deviations from stabilized conditions due, amongst others, to external perturbations.
INITIAL APPROACH 2 Applicable to: B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748,
B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006 Impacted by TDU: 00013522 Initial Approach - Initial Approach Impacted by TDU: 00013522 Initial Approach - Initial Approach
ENG START selector.............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or heavy rain, or if severe turbulence is expected in the approach or go-around area. SEATBELTS........................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO APPROACH PHASE............................................................................................................. ACTIVATE ‐ In NAV mode, the APPR phase automatically activates at the DECEL pseudo waypoint. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, manually activate the APPR phase on the PERF APPR page, when the distance to land is approximately 15 nm. For RNP AR approach: GPS 1+2 on GPS MONITOR page.............................................................CHECK BOTH IN NAV RNP on PROG page............................................................................................. CHECK/INSERT GPS PRIMARY on PROG page..................................................................... CHECK AVAILABLE HIGH ACCURACY...............................................................................................................CHECK AP.................................................................................................................................... AS RQRD POSITIONING........................................................................................................................MONITOR ‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, use the energy circle displayed on ND representing the required distance to land. MANAGED SPEED.................................................................................................................... CHECK If the ATC requires a particular speed, use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint no longer applies, return to managed speed. SPEEDBRAKES lever............................................................................................................AS RQRD RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← A to B →
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 12/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405 Impacted by TDU: 00013522 Initial Approach - Initial Approach
ENG START selector.............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or heavy rain, or if severe turbulence is expected in the approach or go-around area. SEATBELTS........................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO APPROACH PHASE............................................................................................................. ACTIVATE ‐ In NAV mode, the APPR phase automatically activates at the DECEL pseudo waypoint. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, manually activate the APPR phase on the PERF APPR page, when the distance to land is approximately 15 nm. POSITIONING........................................................................................................................MONITOR ‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, use the energy circle displayed on ND representing the required distance to land. MANAGED SPEED.................................................................................................................... CHECK If the ATC requires a particular speed, use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint no longer applies, return to managed speed. SPEEDBRAKES lever............................................................................................................AS RQRD RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412 Impacted by TDU: 00013522 Initial Approach - Initial Approach
ENG START selector.............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or heavy rain, or if severe turbulence is expected in the approach or go-around area. SEATBELTS........................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO APPROACH PHASE............................................................................................................. ACTIVATE ‐ In NAV mode, the APPR phase automatically activates at the DECEL pseudo waypoint. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, manually activate the APPR phase on the PERF APPR page, when the distance to land is approximately 15 nm. For RNP AR approach: GPS 1+2 on GPS MONITOR page.............................................................CHECK BOTH IN NAV RNP on PROG page............................................................................................. CHECK/INSERT GPS PRIMARY on PROG page..................................................................... CHECK AVAILABLE HIGH ACCURACY...............................................................................................................CHECK CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 13/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
RNP pb........................................................................................................................................ON Only for the RNP AR approach. AP pb...............................................................................................................................AS RQRD Note:
AP pb must be engaged for RNP AR < 0.3.
POSITIONING........................................................................................................................MONITOR ‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, use the energy circle displayed on ND representing the required distance to land. MANAGED SPEED.................................................................................................................... CHECK If the ATC requires a particular speed, use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint no longer applies, return to managed speed. SPEEDBRAKES lever............................................................................................................AS RQRD RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE 3 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727,
B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006 Impacted DU: 00011825 Initial Approach - Initial Approach
ENG START selector.............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or heavy rain, or if severe turbulence is expected in the approach or go-around area. SEATBELTS........................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO APPROACH PHASE............................................................................................................. ACTIVATE ‐ In NAV mode, the APPR phase automatically activates at the DECEL pseudo waypoint. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, manually activate the APPR phase on the PERF APPR page, when the distance to land is approximately 15 nm. For RNP AR approach: GPS 1+2 on GPS MONITOR page.............................................................CHECK BOTH IN NAV RNP on PROG page............................................................................................. CHECK/INSERT GPS PRIMARY on PROG page..................................................................... CHECK AVAILABLE HIGH ACCURACY...............................................................................................................CHECK AP.................................................................................................................................... AS RQRD POSITIONING........................................................................................................................MONITOR ‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, use the energy circle displayed on ND representing the required distance to land. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 14/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
MANAGED SPEED.................................................................................................................... CHECK If the ATC requires a particular speed, use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint no longer applies, return to managed speed. SPEEDBRAKES lever............................................................................................................AS RQRD RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 200. 1. If the weather is good, or no significant, in order to check that the radar is operating correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes. 2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique. 3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground clutter appears on the upper part of the display. 4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain. 4 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215,
B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405 Impacted DU: 00011825 Initial Approach - Initial Approach
ENG START selector.............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or heavy rain, or if severe turbulence is expected in the approach or go-around area. SEATBELTS........................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO APPROACH PHASE............................................................................................................. ACTIVATE ‐ In NAV mode, the APPR phase automatically activates at the DECEL pseudo waypoint. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, manually activate the APPR phase on the PERF APPR page, when the distance to land is approximately 15 nm. POSITIONING........................................................................................................................MONITOR ‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, use the energy circle displayed on ND representing the required distance to land.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 15/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
MANAGED SPEED.................................................................................................................... CHECK If the ATC requires a particular speed, use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint no longer applies, return to managed speed. SPEEDBRAKES lever............................................................................................................AS RQRD RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 200. 1. If the weather is good, or no significant, in order to check that the radar is operating correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes. 2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique. 3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground clutter appears on the upper part of the display. 4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain. Applicable to: B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417 Impacted DU: 00011825 Initial Approach - Initial Approach
ENG START selector.............................................................................................................AS RQRD Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or heavy rain, or if severe turbulence is expected in the approach or go-around area. SEATBELTS........................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO APPROACH PHASE............................................................................................................. ACTIVATE ‐ In NAV mode, the APPR phase automatically activates at the DECEL pseudo waypoint. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, manually activate the APPR phase on the PERF APPR page, when the distance to land is approximately 15 nm. For RNP AR approach: GPS 1+2 on GPS MONITOR page.............................................................CHECK BOTH IN NAV RNP on PROG page............................................................................................. CHECK/INSERT GPS PRIMARY on PROG page..................................................................... CHECK AVAILABLE HIGH ACCURACY...............................................................................................................CHECK AP.................................................................................................................................... AS RQRD
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 16/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
POSITIONING........................................................................................................................MONITOR ‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page. ‐ In HDG or TRK mode, use the energy circle displayed on ND representing the required distance to land. MANAGED SPEED.................................................................................................................... CHECK If the ATC requires a particular speed, use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint no longer applies, return to managed speed. SPEEDBRAKES lever............................................................................................................AS RQRD RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE Gain must be manually set to +8, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below FL 150. Note:
1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on the ND. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily MANUAL TILT. 2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard techniques.
Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
NAVIGATION ACCURACY....................................................................................................MONITOR When GPS PRIMARY is available, no accuracy check is required. When GPS PRIMARY is lost, check the PROG page to ensure that the required navigation accuracy is appropriate to the phase of flight. Perform a navigation accuracy check (Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A Cruise - Navigation Accuracy) . If the approach is stored in the navigation database, determine the strategy to be used for the final approach, according to the table below: NAVIGATION ACCURACY
Approach guidance
GPS PRIMARY NAV ACCUR HIGH NAV ACCUR LOW and NAV ACCURACY check ≤ 1 nm
Managed*** or selected
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PF
ND
PNF
ARC or ROSE NAV * With NAVAID raw data
AP/FD mode
NAV-FPA or APP-NAV/ FINAL *** Continued on the following page
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 17/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
NAVIGATION ACCURACY
GPS PRIMARY LOST and NAV ACCUR LOW and NAV ACCURACY check > 1 nm GPS PRIMARY LOST and aircraft flying within unreliable radio NAVAID area
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
Approach guidance
Selected
PF
ND
Continued from the previous page
AP/FD mode
PNF
ARC or ROSE NAV or ROSE VOR ** With NAVAID raw data
ROSE VOR **
TRK-FPA
(*) For VOR approaches, one flight crew may select ROSE VOR. (**) For LOC approaches, select ROSE ILS. (***) Managed vertical guidance can be used, provided that the approach coding in the navigation database was validated. Note:
1. During approach in overlay to a conventional radio NAVAID procedure, monitor raw data. If raw data indicates unsatisfactory managed guidance, revert to selected guidance. 2. The flight crew can continue to fly a managed approach, after they receive a NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD message, if raw data indicates that the guidance is satisfactory.
5 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
NAVIGATION ACCURACY....................................................................................................MONITOR When GPS PRIMARY is available, no accuracy check is required. When GPS PRIMARY is lost, check the PROG page to ensure that the required navigation accuracy is appropriate to the phase of flight. Perform a navigation accuracy check (Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A Cruise - Navigation Accuracy) . If the approach is stored in the navigation database, determine the strategy to be used for the final approach, according to the table below: NAVIGATION ACCURACY
Approach guidance
GPS PRIMARY NAV ACCUR HIGH NAV ACCUR LOW and NAV ACCURACY check ≤ 1 nm
Managed*** or selected
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PF
ND
PNF
ARC or ROSE NAV * With NAVAID raw data
AP/FD mode
NAV-FPA or APP-NAV/ FINAL *** Continued on the following page
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 18/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
NAVIGATION ACCURACY
GPS PRIMARY LOST and NAV ACCUR LOW and NAV ACCURACY check > 1 nm GPS PRIMARY LOST and aircraft flying within unreliable radio NAVAID area
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
Approach guidance
Selected
PF
ROSE VOR **
Continued from the previous page
ND
AP/FD mode
PNF
ARC or ROSE NAV or ROSE VOR ** With NAVAID raw data
TRK-FPA
(*) For VOR approaches, one flight crew may select ROSE VOR. (**) For LOC approaches, select ROSE ILS. (***) Managed vertical guidance can be used, provided that the approach coding in the navigation database was validated. For RNP AR approach, FINAL APP mode is required. Note:
1. During approach in overlay to a conventional radio NAVAID procedure, monitor raw data. If raw data indicates unsatisfactory managed guidance, revert to selected guidance. 2. The flight crew can continue to fly a managed approach, after they receive a NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD message, if raw data indicates that the guidance is satisfactory.
Applicable to: ALL
APPROACH CHECKLIST ....................................................................................................PERFORM
INTERMEDIATE/FINAL APPROACH Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
RNAV APPROACH GPS 1+2 on GPS MONITOR page............................................................... CHECK BOTH IN NAV GPS PRIMARY on PROG page........................................................................CHECK AVAILABLE If GPS PRIMARY is not available RNP for approach...............................................................................................CHECK/ENTER HIGH accuracy.................................................................................................................CHECK Note:
RNAV approach without GPS is subject to a specific operational approval.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to C →
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 19/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
6 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
RNAV APPROACH GPS 1+2 on GPS MONITOR page............................................................... CHECK BOTH IN NAV GPS PRIMARY on PROG page........................................................................CHECK AVAILABLE If GPS PRIMARY is not available RNP for approach...............................................................................................CHECK/ENTER HIGH accuracy.................................................................................................................CHECK Note:
RNAV approach without GPS is subject to a specific operational approval.
For RNP AR approach only: Altimeters................................................................................................................. SET/CHECK After setting the BARO REF and before reaching the FAF, verify current QNH and crosscheck altimeters are within 75 ft. Applicable to: ALL
APPR MODE ACTIVATION For approach in managed vertical guidance: APPR pb on FCU.............................................................................................................PRESS Once cleared for the approach, press the pushbutton when flying towards the FAF. Check that APPR NAV is engaged, FINAL is armed, and the VDEV scale is on the PFD. Note:
For instructions for switching from a non ILS to an ILS approach Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 Switching from Non ILS to ILS Approach
Applicable to: ALL
AT GREEN DOT SPEED FLAPS 1............................................................................................................................... ORDER FLAPS 1................................................................................................................................SELECT ‐ Check deceleration toward S speed. ‐ If the aircraft speed is significantly higher than S speed on the glideslope, or if the aircraft does not decelerate on the flight path, extend the landing gear to slow it down. It is also possible to use speedbrakes. However, the flight crew must be aware that the use of speedbrakes causes an increase in VLS.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 20/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
TCAS Mode selector....................................................................................................TA OR TA/RA ‐ See ILS approach Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B Intermediate/Final Approach - At Green Dot Speed ND DISPLAY............................................................................................... SELECT RANGE/MODE Applicable to: ALL
AT S SPEED FLAPS 2 ............................................................................................................................... ORDER FLAPS 2 .............................................................................................................................. SELECT ‐ Check deceleration toward F speed. ‐ If the aircraft speed is significantly higher than F speed on the flight path, or if the aircraft does not decelerate on the flight path, extend the landing gear in order to slow down the aircraft. The use of speedbrakes is not recommended. ‐ When the speedbrakes are deployed, extending the flaps beyond FLAPS 1 may cause a slight roll movement, and in calm conditions a small lateral control asymmetry may remain until it is affected by control input or an atmospheric disturbance. Applicable to: ALL
WHEN FLAPS ARE AT 2 LDG GEAR DOWN ...............................................................................................................ORDER LDG GEAR lever......................................................................................................SELECT DOWN AUTO BRK ........................................................................................................................CONFIRM If the runway conditions have changed from the approach briefing, consider another braking mode. GROUND SPOILERS ................................................................................................................ARM EXTERIOR LIGHTS sw............................................................................................................... SET Set NOSE selector to TAXI and RWY TURN OFF sw to ON. Applicable to: ALL
WHEN LANDING GEAR DOWN FLAPS 3.................................................................................................................................ORDER FLAPS 3................................................................................................................................SELECT ‐ Select FLAPS 3 below VFE next.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 21/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
WHEEL SD page .................................................................................................................. CHECK ‐ The WHEEL SD page appears below 800 ft, or at landing gear extension. ‐ Check for three green indications on the landing gear indicator panel. At least one green triangle on each landing gear strut on the WHEEL SD page is sufficient to indicate that the landing gear is downlocked. Rely also on the “LDG GEAR DN” green LDG MEMO message to confirm that the landing gear is downlocked. If residual pressure is indicated on the triple indicator: RESIDUAL BRAKING PROC........................................................................................... APPLY Note:
Due to the accomplishment of the alternate braking functional test after the landing gear is downlocked, brief brake pressure indications may be observed on BRAKE PRESS.
FLAPS FULL.......................................................................................................................... ORDER FLAPS FULL......................................................................................................................... SELECT ‐ Select FLAPS FULL below VFE next. ‐ Retract the speedbrakes before selecting FLAPS FULL to prevent a pitch down when the speedbrakes automatically retract. ‐ Check deceleration toward VAPP. ‐ Check correct TO waypoint on the ND. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
APPROACH STRATEGIES MANAGED VERTICAL GUIDANCE After the FAF: FMA..............................................................................................................................CHECK Check FINAL APP green on the FMA. GO AROUND ALTITUDE..................................................................................................SET Set, when below the go-around altitude.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 22/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
POSITION/FLIGHT PATH....................................................................................... MONITOR ‐ For approach in overlay to a conventional radio NAVAID procedure: Use radio NAVAID raw data and altitude to monitor the lateral and vertical navigation. If the navigation is not satisfactory, revert to selected guidance. In particular, monitor the vertical guidance, using altitude indication versus radio NAVAID position, and be prepared to revert to NAV-FPA, if the vertical guidance is not satisfactory. ‐ For RNAV approach: Monitor VDEV and FPV (on the PFD) and XTK error (on the ND). Use altitude indication versus distance to the runway to monitor the vertical navigation. If the vertical guidance is not satisfactory, revert to NAV/FPA or consider the go-around. If the lateral guidance is not satisfactory, perform a go-around. SELECTED VERTICAL OR SELECTED LATERAL AND VERTICAL GUIDANCE At FAF: FPA for final approach...................................................................................................... SET After the FAF: GO AROUND ALTITUDE..................................................................................................SET Set, when below the go-around altitude. POSITION/FLIGHT PATH........................................................................ MONITOR/ADJUST ‐ For approach in overlay to a conventional radio NAVAID procedure: Use radio NAVAID raw data to monitor the lateral navigation. Using altitude indication versus radio NAVAID position, adjust the FPA, as necessary, to follow the published descent profile, taking into account the minimum altitudes. Do not use the FMGC VDEV on the PFD. If the lateral navigation is not satisfactory, revert to TRK/FPA. ‐ For RNAV approach: Monitor XTK error on ND. Using altitude indication versus distance to the runway, adjust the FPA as necessary to follow the published descent profile, taking into account the minimum altitudes. If the lateral guidance is not satisfactory, perform a go-around.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 23/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
7 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
APPROACH STRATEGIES MANAGED VERTICAL GUIDANCE After the FAF: FMA..............................................................................................................................CHECK Check FINAL APP green on the FMA. GO AROUND ALTITUDE..................................................................................................SET Set, when below the go-around altitude. POSITION/FLIGHT PATH....................................................................................... MONITOR ‐ For approach in overlay to a conventional radio NAVAID procedure: Use radio NAVAID raw data and altitude to monitor the lateral and vertical navigation. If the navigation is not satisfactory, revert to selected guidance. In particular, monitor the vertical guidance, using altitude indication versus radio NAVAID position, and be prepared to revert to NAV-FPA, if the vertical guidance is not satisfactory. ‐ For RNAV approach: Monitor VDEV and FPV (on the PFD) and XTK error (on the ND). Use altitude indication versus distance to the runway to monitor the vertical navigation. If the vertical guidance is not satisfactory, revert to NAV/FPA or consider the go-around. If the lateral guidance is not satisfactory, perform a go-around. SELECTED VERTICAL OR SELECTED LATERAL AND VERTICAL GUIDANCE At FAF: FPA for final approach...................................................................................................... SET After the FAF: GO AROUND ALTITUDE..................................................................................................SET Set, when below the go-around altitude.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 24/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
POSITION/FLIGHT PATH........................................................................ MONITOR/ADJUST ‐ For approach in overlay to a conventional radio NAVAID procedure: Use radio NAVAID raw data to monitor the lateral navigation. Using altitude indication versus radio NAVAID position, adjust the FPA, as necessary, to follow the published descent profile, taking into account the minimum altitudes. Do not use the FMGC VDEV on the PFD. If the lateral navigation is not satisfactory, revert to TRK/FPA. ‐ For RNAV approach: Monitor XTK error on ND. Using altitude indication versus distance to the runway, adjust the FPA as necessary to follow the published descent profile, taking into account the minimum altitudes. If the lateral guidance is not satisfactory, perform a go-around. Applicable to: ALL
FINAL APPROACH A/THR pb.................................................................................. CHECK IN SPEED MODE OR OFF WING ANTI ICE pb-sw................................................................................................................OFF Switch WING ANTI ICE pb-sw ON in severe icing conditions only. SLIDING TABLE.......................................................................................................................STOW LDG MEMO................................................................................................. CHECK NO BLUE LINE CABIN REPORT....................................................................................................................OBTAIN CABIN CREW........................................................................................................................ ADVISE LANDING CHECKLIST................................................................................................... COMPLETE FLIGHT PARAMETERS......................................................................................................... CHECK PF announces any FMA modification. PNF calls out: ‐ ”SPEED”, if the speed decreases below the speed target –5 kt , or increases above the speed target +10 kt. ‐ ”SINK RATE”, when V/S is greater than –1000 ft/min. ‐ ”BANK”, when the bank angle goes above 7 °. ‐ ”PITCH”, when the pitch attitude goes below –2.5 °, or goes above +10 ° degrees. ‐ ”COURSE”, when the course deviation is greater than 1/2 dot or 2.5 ° (VOR), or 5 ° (ADF). ‐ ”_ FT HIGH (LOW)” at altitude checkpoints. Following PNF flight parameter exceedance callout, the suitable PF response will be:
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 25/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
‐ Acknowledge the PNF callout, for proper crew coordination purposes ‐ Take immediate corrective action to control the exceeded parameter back into the defined stabilized conditions ‐ Assess whether stabilized conditions will be recovered early enough prior to landing, otherwise initiate a go-around. Applicable to: ALL
AT ENTERED MINIMUM+ 100 FT ONE HUNDRED ABOVE.......................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
AT ENTERED MINIMUM MINIMUM...............................................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE If ground references are visible: CONTINUE...............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE AP pb.....................................................................................................................................OFF Continue, as with a visual approach Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-20-A Visual Approach Introduction If ground references are not visible: GO AROUND...........................................................................................................ANNOUNCE Initiate a go-around. Note:
1. When FINAL APP mode is engaged, the AP/FD will disengage under the following conditions, depending on which one occurs first: ‐ At the minimum minus 50 ft (if entered) or at 400 ft AGL (if no minimum is entered), or ‐ At the Missed Approach Point (MAP). 2. In selected guidance, if ground references are not visible when the aircraft reaches minimum, the flight crew should make an immediate go-around. However, if the distance to the runway is not properly assessed, a step descent approach may be considered and a level-off at minimum may be performed while searching for visual references. If the flight crew has no visual reference at MAP, at the latest, they must begin a go-around.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 26/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
8 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
AT ENTERED MINIMUM MINIMUM...............................................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE Note:
When the aircraft reaches minimum minus 50 ft, the autopilot remains engaged and will automatically disengage at MAP.
If ground references are visible: CONTINUE...............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE AP pb.....................................................................................................................................OFF Continue, as with a visual approach Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-20-A Visual Approach Introduction If ground references are not visible: GO AROUND...........................................................................................................ANNOUNCE Initiate a go-around. Note:
In selected guidance, if ground references are not visible when the aircraft reaches minimum, the flight crew should make an immediate go-around. However, if the distance to the runway is not properly assessed, a step descent approach may be considered and a level-off at minimum may be performed while searching for visual references. If the flight crew has no visual reference at MAP, at the latest, they must begin a go-around.
CIRCLING APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
CIRCLING APPROACH For a circling approach, the flight crew should prepare the flight plan as follows: Primary flight plan: Introduce the instrument approach Secondary flight plan: ‐ Copy the ACTIVE F-PLN ‐ Revise the Landing runway The aircraft should circle in CONF 3 at F speed. Upon reaching minimum: ‐ Push the V/S/FPA knob to level off. ‐ Search for visual reference. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← C to D →
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 27/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - NON PRECISION APPROACH
If the flight crew finds no visual reference: ‐ AT MAP: Initiate go-around If the flight crew finds sufficient visual references: ‐ Select TRK for downwind ‐ Early on downwind : Activate SEC F-PLN CAUTION
The PNF should activate the SEC F-PLN. The PF should maintain visual contact during all the circling.
‐ Disengage autopilot before reaching the base leg. ‐ Select both FDs OFF. LOW VISIBILITY CIRCLING APPROACH PATTERN
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D
PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 28/28 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - VISUAL APPROACH
VISUAL APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION Perform the approach on a nominal 3 ° glideslope using visual references. Approach to be stabilized by 500 ft AGL on the correct approach path, in the landing configuration, at VAPP. Method: ‐ The autopilot is not used ‐ Both FDs are off ‐ FPV use is recommended ‐ A/THR use is recommended with managed speed. Bear in mind the possible risk of optical illusions due to hindered night vision. INITIAL/INTERMEDIATE APPROACH The flight plan selected on the MCDU should include the selection of the landing runway. The downwind leg may also be part of the flight plan. This may be a useful indication of the aircraft position in the circuit on the ND. However, visual references must be used. Therefore, at the beginning of the downwind leg: Manually ACTIVATE APPR. Select FDs to OFF. Select TRK-FPA to have FPV displayed. Check A/THR active. Extend the downwind leg to 45 s (± wind correction). Turn into base leg with a maximum of 30 ° of bank. Descent with approximate FPA, in FLAPS 2, at F speed. FINAL APPROACH The speed trend arrow and FPV help the flight crew make timely and correct thrust settings (if in manual thrust), and approach path corrections. Avoid descending through the correct approach path with idle thrust. (Late recognition of this situation without a prompt thrust increase may lead to considerable speed decay and altitude loss). Ensure that the aircraft is stabilized on the final descent path at VAPP (or ground speed mini) in the landing configuration with the thrust stabilized (usually above idle) at 500 ft above airfield elevation or as restricted by Operator policy/regulations. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-20 P 1/2 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - VISUAL APPROACH
If the aircraft is not stabilized, the flight crew must initiate a go-around, unless they think that only small corrections are necessary to rectify minor deviations from stabilized conditions due, amongst others, to external perturbations. Avoid any tendency to “duck under” in the late stages of the approach. Avoid destabilizing the approach in the last 100 ft, in order to have the best chance of performing a good touchdown at the desired position. VISUAL APPROACH (1 OR 2 ENGINES) PATTERN
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-20 P 2/2 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
ILS FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING GEOMETRY Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 1/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
ILS FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING GEOMETRY 1 Applicable to: B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790,
B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 2/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
ILS FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING GEOMETRY 2 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 3/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
MINIMUM VISUAL GROUND SEGMENTS (FLARE PHASE) Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 4/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
This drawing shows that, for a CAT III landing (60 m minimum visual segment), the minimum RVR is 100 m at 15 ft. MINIMUM VISUAL GROUND SEGMENTS (FLARE PHASE)
3 Applicable to: B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790,
B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 5/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
This drawing shows that, for a CAT III landing (60 m minimum visual segment), the minimum RVR is 103 m at 15 ft.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 6/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
MINIMUM VISUAL GROUND SEGMENTS (FLARE PHASE) 4 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 7/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
This drawing shows that, for a CAT III landing (60 m minimum visual segment), the minimum RVR is 107 m at 15 ft. GROUND CLEARANCE DIAGRAM
5 Applicable to: B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790,
B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to C →
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 8/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
GROUND CLEARANCE DIAGRAM 6 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210,
B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
LANDING 7 Applicable to: B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6790, B-6795,
B-6811
FLARE The cockpit cut-off angle is 20 °.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← C to D →
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 9/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
In stabilized approach conditions, the flare height is approximately 30 ft: FLARE........................................................................................................................ PERFORM ATTITUDE................................................................................................................... MONITOR ”PITCH, PITCH” auto-callout is available. The PNF should monitor the attitude, and call out: ‐ “PITCH, PITCH”, if the pitch angle reaches 10 °. ‐ “BANK, BANK”, if the bank angle reaches 7 °. THRUST levers.................................................................................................................... IDLE If autothrust is engaged, it automatically disconnects when the pilot sets both thrust levers to the IDLE detent. In manual landing conditions, the “RETARD” callout is triggered at 20 ft Radio Altitude (RA), in order to remind the pilot to retard the thrust levers. Note:
The ground spoilers extension is inhibited if: ‐ Both thrust levers remain above the idle detent, or ‐ One thrust lever is above idle and one thrust lever is at idle detent.
GROUND CLEARANCE Avoid flaring high. A tailstrike occurs, if the pitch attitude exceeds 13.5 ° (11 ° with the landing gear compressed). A wingtip or engine scrape occurs, if the roll angle exceeds 20 ° (16 ° with the landing gear compressed). Be aware of the pitch-up tendency, with ground spoiler extension. Applicable to: B-6416, B-6417
FLARE The cockpit cut-off angle is 20 °. In stabilized approach conditions, the flare height is approximately 30 ft: FLARE........................................................................................................................ PERFORM ATTITUDE................................................................................................................... MONITOR The PNF should monitor the attitude, and call out: ‐ “PITCH, PITCH”, if the pitch angle reaches 10 °. ‐ “BANK, BANK”, if the bank angle reaches 7 °. THRUST levers.................................................................................................................... IDLE If autothrust is engaged, it automatically disconnects when the pilot sets both thrust levers to the IDLE detent. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 10/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
In manual landing conditions, the “RETARD” callout is triggered at 20 ft Radio Altitude (RA), in order to remind the pilot to retard the thrust levers. Note:
The ground spoilers extension is inhibited if: ‐ Both thrust levers remain above the idle detent, or ‐ One thrust lever is above idle and one thrust lever is at idle detent.
GROUND CLEARANCE Avoid flaring high. A tailstrike occurs, if the pitch attitude exceeds 15.5 ° (13.5 ° with the landing gear compressed). A wingtip or engine scrape occurs, if the roll angle exceeds 18 ° (16 ° with the landing gear compressed). Be aware of the pitch-up tendency, with ground spoiler extension. Applicable to: MSN 5006 8
FLARE The cockpit cut-off angle is 20 °. In stabilized approach conditions, the flare height is approximately 30 ft: FLARE........................................................................................................................ PERFORM ATTITUDE................................................................................................................... MONITOR The PNF should monitor the attitude, and call out: ‐ “PITCH, PITCH”, if the pitch angle reaches 10 °. ‐ “BANK, BANK”, if the bank angle reaches 7 °. THRUST levers.................................................................................................................... IDLE If autothrust is engaged, it automatically disconnects when the pilot sets both thrust levers to the IDLE detent. In manual landing conditions, the “RETARD” callout is triggered at 20 ft Radio Altitude (RA), in order to remind the pilot to retard the thrust levers. Note:
If one or both thrust levers remain above the IDLE detent, ground spoilers extension is inhibited.
GROUND CLEARANCE Avoid flaring high. A tailstrike occurs, if the pitch attitude exceeds 13.5 ° (11 ° with the landing gear compressed).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 11/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
A wingtip or engine scrape occurs, if the roll angle exceeds 20 ° (16 ° with the landing gear compressed). Be aware of the pitch-up tendency, with ground spoiler extension. 9 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210,
B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, D-AVYF
FLARE The cockpit cut-off angle is 20 °. In stabilized approach conditions, the flare height is approximately 30 ft: FLARE........................................................................................................................ PERFORM ATTITUDE................................................................................................................... MONITOR The PNF should monitor the attitude, and call out: ‐ “PITCH, PITCH”, if the pitch angle reaches 10 °. ‐ “BANK, BANK”, if the bank angle reaches 7 °. THRUST levers.................................................................................................................... IDLE If autothrust is engaged, it automatically disconnects when the pilot sets both thrust levers to the IDLE detent. In manual landing conditions, the “RETARD” callout is triggered at 20 ft Radio Altitude (RA), in order to remind the pilot to retard the thrust levers. Note:
If one or both thrust levers remain above the IDLE detent, ground spoilers extension is inhibited.
GROUND CLEARANCE Avoid flaring high. A tailstrike occurs, if the pitch attitude exceeds 15.5 ° (13.5 ° with the landing gear compressed). A wingtip or engine scrape occurs, if the roll angle exceeds 18 ° (16 ° with the landing gear compressed). Be aware of the pitch-up tendency, with ground spoiler extension. Applicable to: B-6789, B-6837 10
FLARE The cockpit cut-off angle is 20 °. In stabilized approach conditions, the flare height is approximately 30 ft: FLARE........................................................................................................................ PERFORM
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 12/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
ATTITUDE................................................................................................................... MONITOR ”PITCH, PITCH” auto-callout is available. The PNF should monitor the attitude, and call out: ‐ “PITCH, PITCH”, if the pitch angle reaches 10 °. ‐ “BANK, BANK”, if the bank angle reaches 7 °. THRUST levers.................................................................................................................... IDLE If autothrust is engaged, it automatically disconnects when the pilot sets both thrust levers to the IDLE detent. In manual landing conditions, the “RETARD” callout is triggered at 20 ft Radio Altitude (RA), in order to remind the pilot to retard the thrust levers. Note:
If one or both thrust levers remain above the IDLE detent, ground spoilers extension is inhibited.
GROUND CLEARANCE Avoid flaring high. A tailstrike occurs, if the pitch attitude exceeds 13.5 ° (11 ° with the landing gear compressed). A wingtip or engine scrape occurs, if the roll angle exceeds 20 ° (16 ° with the landing gear compressed). Be aware of the pitch-up tendency, with ground spoiler extension. Applicable to: ALL
AT TOUCHDOWN DEROTATION...................................................................................................................... INITIATE ‐ Lower the nosewheel without undue delay. ‐ The PNF continues to monitor the attitude. BOTH THRUST LEVERS...................................................................................................REV MAX ‐ Select MAX REV immediately after the main landing gear touches down. If the airport regulations restrict the use of thrust reversers, select and maintain the thrust levers in reverse idle position until taxi speed is reached. A slight pitch up that can be easily controlled by the pilot, may occur when the thrust reversers are deployed before the nose landing gear touches down. ‐ After reverse thrust is selected, the flight crew must perform a full stop landing. GROUND SPOILERS....................................................................................... CHECK/ANNOUNCE Check that the WHEEL SD page displays the ground spoilers extended after touchdown. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 13/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
If no ground spoilers are extended: ‐ Verify and confirm that both thrust levers are set to IDLE or REV detent. ‐ Set both thrust reverser levers to REV MAX, and fully press the brake pedals. Note:
If ground spoilers are not armed, ground spoilers extend at reverser thrust selection.
REVERSERS.................................................................................................... CHECK/ANNOUNCE Check that the ECAM E/WD displays that the reverse deployment is as expected (REV green). DIRECTIONAL CONTROL.................................................................................MONITOR/ENSURE ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
Monitor directional control, if the rollout is automatic. Ensure directional control, if rollout is manual. Use rudder pedals for directional control. Do not use the nosewheel steering control handle before reaching taxi speed. During rollout, the flight crew should avoid sidestick inputs (either lateral or longitudinal). If directional control problems are encountered, the flight crew should reduce thrust to reverse idle until directional control is satisfactory.
BRAKES............................................................................................................................. AS RQRD ‐ Monitor the autobrake, if it is ON. When required, brake with the pedals ‐ Although the green hydraulic system supplies the braking system, if pedals are pressed rapidly, a brake pressure indication appears briefly on the BRAKE PRESS indicator. ‐ Braking may begin before the nosewheel has touched down, if required for performance reasons. However, when comfort is the priority, the flight crew should delay braking until the nosewheel has touched down. Note:
If no ground spoilers are extended, the autobrake is not activated.
DECELERATION.............................................................................................. CHECK/ANNOUNCE The deceleration is felt by the flight crew, and confirmed by the speed trend on the PFD. The deceleration may also be confirmed by the DECEL light (if autobrake is ON). Applicable to: ALL
AT 70 KT BOTH THRUST LEVERS.................................................................................................. REV IDLE It is better to reduce thrust when passing 70 kt. However, high levels of reverse thrust may be used in order to control aircraft speed in the case of an emergency. CAUTION
Avoid the use of high levels of reverse thrust at low airspeed, unless required due to an emergency. The distortion of the airflow, caused by gases reentering the compressor, can cause engine stalls that may result in excessive EGT.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D→
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 14/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
Applicable to: ALL
AT TAXI SPEED BOTH THRUST LEVERS..................................................................................................FWD IDLE ‐ When reaching taxi speed, and before leaving the runway, deselect the reversers. ‐ On snow-covered grounds, the reversers should be stowed when the aircraft speed reaches 25 kt. ‐ When deselecting the reversers, be careful not to apply forward thrust by moving the thrust levers beyond the FWD IDLE position. CAUTION
Except in an emergency, do not use the reverse thrust to control the aircraft speed while on taxiways.
On taxiways, the use of reversers, even when restricted to idle thrust, would have the following effects: ‐ The engines may ingest fine sand and debris that may be detrimental to the engines and airframe systems. ‐ On snow–covered areas, snow will recirculate into the air inlet, and may cause an engine flameout or rollback. Applicable to: ALL
BEFORE 20 KT AUTO BRK................................................................................................................... DISENGAGE Disengage the autobrake to avoid some brake jerks at low speed.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 15/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 16/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
GO AROUND WITH FD Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
Apply the following three actions simultaneously: THRUST levers.............................................................................................................................TOGA If TOGA thrust is not required, set the thrust levers to TOGA detent then retard the thrust levers as required. This enables to engage the GO-AROUND phase, with associated AP/FD modes. Note:
If the thrust levers are not set briefly to TOGA detent, the FMS does not engage the GO-AROUND phase, and flying over, or close to the airport (less than 5 nm) will sequence the Destination waypoint in the F-PLN.
ROTATION............................................................................................................................PERFORM Initiate rotation towards 15 ° of pitch with all engines operative (approximately 12.5 ° if one engine is out) to get a positive rate of climb, then follow the SRS Flight Director pitch bars orders. GO AROUND .................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE FLAPS lever............................................................................................................SELECT AS RQRD Retract one step of flaps. FMA............................................................................................................. CHECK AND ANNOUNCE Check the FMA on the PFD. The following modes are displayed: MAN TOGA / SRS / GA TRK / A/THR (in blue). POSITIVE CLIMB ..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE LDG GEAR UP .........................................................................................................................ORDER L/G lever............................................................................................................................. SELECT UP NAV or HDG mode................................................................................................................ AS RQRD Reselect NAV or HDG, as required (minimum height 100 ft). AP...........................................................................................................................................AS RQRD Note:
Go-around may be flown with both autopilots engaged. Whenever any other mode engages, AP 2 disengages.
1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
Apply the following three actions simultaneously: THRUST levers.............................................................................................................................TOGA If TOGA thrust is not required, set the thrust levers to TOGA detent then retard the thrust levers as required. This enables to engage the GO-AROUND phase, with associated AP/FD modes.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 1/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
If the thrust levers are not set briefly to TOGA detent, the FMS does not engage the GO-AROUND phase, and flying over, or close to the airport (less than 5 nm) will sequence the Destination waypoint in the F-PLN.
ROTATION............................................................................................................................PERFORM Initiate rotation towards 15 ° of pitch with all engines operative (approximately 12.5 ° if one engine is out) to get a positive rate of climb, then follow the SRS Flight Director pitch bars orders. GO AROUND .................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE FLAPS lever............................................................................................................SELECT AS RQRD Retract one step of flaps. FMA............................................................................................................. CHECK AND ANNOUNCE Check that the following modes are displayed : MAN TOGA / SRS / NAV / A/THR (in blue). For RNP AR, check that NAV mode engages immediately (minimum height 100 ft). POSITIVE CLIMB ..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE LDG GEAR UP .........................................................................................................................ORDER L/G lever............................................................................................................................. SELECT UP NAV or HDG mode................................................................................................................ AS RQRD Select NAV or HDG, as required (minimum height 100 ft). AP...........................................................................................................................................AS RQRD Note:
Go-around may be flown with both autopilots engaged. Whenever any other mode engages, AP 2 disengages.
Applicable to: ALL
AT GO-AROUND THRUST REDUCTION ALTITUDE THRUST levers.............................................................................................................................. CL LVR CLB flashing on FMA. 2 Applicable to: ALL 3
AT GO-AROUND ACCELERATION ALTITUDE Monitor that the target speed increases to green dot. If the target speed does not increase to green dot: ALT knob........................................................................................................ CHECK and PULL At F speed: FLAPS 1.......................................................................................................................... ORDER FLAPS 1......................................................................................................................... SELECT
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 2/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
At S speed: FLAPS ZERO.................................................................................................................. ORDER FLAPS ZERO................................................................................................................. SELECT GRND SPLRS................................................................................................................ DISARM EXTERIOR LIGHTS.............................................................................................................. SET Set to OFF the NOSE sw and the RWY TURN OFF sw. The flight crew can maintain the LAND sw set to ON, according to airline policy or regulatory recommendations. Note:
Consider the next step: ‐ Engage NAV mode, to follow the published missed approach procedure, or ‐ Prepare for a second approach by selecting the ACTIVATE APP PHASE, and CONFIRM on the PERF page.
AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB CHECKLIST DOWN TO THE LINE......................................COMPLETE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 3/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 4/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
AFTER LANDING Applicable to: ALL
LAND lights............................................................................................................................ RETRACT Retract landing lights, unless they are needed. STROBE selector..........................................................................................................................AUTO When leaving the runway, set the STROBE lights to AUTO. OTHER EXT LIGHTS............................................................................................................ AS RQRD External lights can be turned off, unless they are needed. Set the NAV & LOGO to ON, as required, to turn on the navigation and logo lights . Applicable to: ALL
GROUND SPOILERS............................................................................................................... DISARM Applicable to: ALL
RADAR.................................................................................................................................. OFF/STBY Applicable to: ALL
PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM .....................................................................................OFF Switching the radar and predictive windshear system OFF after landing avoids risk of radiating persons at the gate area. Applicable to: ALL
ENG MODE selector....................................................................................................................NORM Applicable to: ALL
FLAPS.................................................................................................................................... RETRACT Set the FLAPS lever to position 0. If the approach was made in icing conditions, or if the runway was contaminated with slush or snow, do not retract the flaps and slats until after engine shutdown and after the ground crew has confirmed that flaps and slats are clear of obstructing ice. On ground, hot weather conditions may cause overheating to be detected around the bleed ducts in the wings, resulting in “AIR L (R) WING LEAK” warnings. Such warnings may be avoided during transit by keeping the slats in Configuration 1 when the OAT is above 30 °C. Applicable to: ALL
TCAS.............................................................................................................................SET on standby
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-23 P 1/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
Applicable to: ALL
ATC........................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD Depending on local regulation, ATC transponder may be operated in mode S Refer to DSC-34-50-10 Description Applicable to: ALL
APU............................................................................................................................................. START APU START may be delayed until just prior to engine shutdown. 1 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
ANTI ICE................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD If engine anti-ice is used, take care to control taxi speed, especially on wet or slippery surfaces. (N1 ground idle is increased). 2 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
ANTI ICE................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD ‐ If engine anti-ice is used, take care to control taxi speed, especially on wet or slippery surfaces. (N1 ground idle is increased). ‐ During ground operation, when in icing conditions and the OAT is plus 3 °C or less, the following procedure should be applied for ice shedding: CAUTION
If, during thrust increase, the aircraft starts to move, immediately retard the thrust levers to IDLE.
If ground surface conditions and the environment permit, the flight crew should accelerate the engines to minimum 50 % of N1 at intervals not greater than 15 min. There is no requirement to maintain the high thrust settings.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-23 P 2/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
Applicable to: ALL
BRAKE TEMPERATURE........................................................................................................... CHECK ‐ Check brake temperature on the WHEEL SD page for discrepancies and high temperature. ‐ If brake fans are installed : Brake fans selection should be delayed for a minimum of about 5 min, or done just before stopping at the gate (whichever occurs first), to allow thermal equalization and stabilization and thus avoid oxidation of brake surface hot spots. Selecting the brake fans before reaching the gate prevents the brake fans from blowing carbon brake dust on the ground personnel. However, when turnaround times are short, or brake temperatures are likely to exceed 500 °C, use the brake fans, disregarding possible oxidation phenomenon. ‐ Refer to PRO-SUP-32 Brake Temperature Limitations Requiring Maintenance Actions for the brake temperature limitations requiring maintenance actions. Applicable to: ALL
AFTER LANDING CHECKLIST.......................................................................................... COMPLETE Ensure that the after-landing checks are completed, once the aircraft has cleared the runway.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-23 P 3/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SOP-23 P 4/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
PARKING Applicable to: ALL
Prior to performing this check, consider “GROUND OPERATIONS IN HEAVY RAIN” (Refer to PRO-SUP-30 Ground Operations in Heavy Rain). Applicable to: ALL
PARKING BRAKE ACCU PRESS............................................................................................. CHECK The ACCU PRESS indication must be in the green band. In case of low accumulator pressure, chocks are required before engine 1 shutdown. PARK BRK handle............................................................................................................................ ON When one brake temperature is above 500 °C (or 350 °C with brake fans ON), avoid applying the parking brake, unless operationally necessary. Check the brake pressure on Triple Indicator for the left and right brakes. CAUTION
If the aircraft starts to move with the parking brake ON: Immediately release the PARK BRK handle, to restore braking with the pedals.
Applicable to: ALL
ANTI-ICE..........................................................................................................................................OFF Applicable to: ALL
APU BLEED pb-sw............................................................................................................................ON Select APU bleed ON, just before engine shutdown, to prevent engine exhaust fumes from entering the air conditioning. 1 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
ENG 1 MASTER sw and ENG 2 MASTER sw............................................................................... OFF CAUTION
If JP4 fuel is used at ambient temperatures higher than 10 °C, dry motor the engines for 2 min after engine shutdown. This dry motor period should start approximately 90 s after the master lever is selected OFF.
After landing, operate the engine at idle for 3 min before shutdown in order to thermally stabilize the hot section of the engine. This 3 min period includes operational time at idle (e.g. taxiing). If APU is not available, set EXT PWR pb to ON, then set ENG MASTERS to OFF. Check that engine parameters decrease. The DOOR/OXY SD page is displayed on the lower ECAM display.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-24 P 1/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
2 Applicable to: B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412,
B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF
ENG 1 MASTER sw and ENG 2 MASTER sw............................................................................... OFF After operation above REV IDLE thrust, or after operation at power level above normal taxi maneuvering power: Operate the engine at, or near, idle for a 3 min cooling period, to avoid rotor case interactions that cause performance degradation of the engine, and possible HPC blade damage. If APU is not available, set EXT PWR pb to ON, then set ENG MASTERS to OFF. Check that engine parameters decrease. The DOOR/OXY SD page is displayed on the lower ECAM display. Applicable to: ALL
GROUND CONTACT.......................................................................................................... ESTABLISH Establish ground communication. Check chocks in place. Applicable to: ALL
SLIDE DISARMED..................................................................................................................... CHECK Check slides disarmed on the DOOR/OXY SD page. Warn the cabin crew, if any slide is not disarmed. Applicable to: ALL
BEACON sw LT...............................................................................................................................OFF Turn off the BEACON lights, when all engines are spooled down. OTHER EXTERIOR LIGHTS................................................................................................. AS RQRD Applicable to: ALL
SEAT BELTS................................................................................................................................... OFF Applicable to: ALL
ELAPSED TIME .................................................................................................................... STOP Applicable to: ALL
FUEL PUMPS..................................................................................................................................OFF Applicable to: ALL
ATC...............................................................................................................................SET on standby
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-24 P 2/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
Applicable to: ALL
IRS PERFORMANCE.................................................................................................................CHECK Drift check ‐ Call up the POSITION MONITOR page. Check that the drift does not exceed the following:
Residual ground speed check: ‐ CAPT and F/O NDs display the IRS 1 and 2 residual ground speeds respectively. The IRS 3 residual ground speed can be read on the CAPT ND by switching the ATT HDG selector to CAPT ON 3. • If ground speed ≥ 15 kt : Report (The IR part of the ADIRU must be considered as failed, if the excessive deviation occurs after two consecutive flights). • If ground speed ≥ 21 kt : Report (The IR part of the ADIRU must be considered as failed). Note:
On aircraft equipped with LITTON IRS, the ground speed check must be performed within the 2 min following aircraft stop. (Ground speed reset to 0 after 2 min).
Applicable to: ALL
FUEL QUANTITY....................................................................................................................... CHECK Check that the sum of the fuel on board and the fuel used is consistent with the fuel on board at departure. If an unusual discrepancy is found, maintenance action is due. Applicable to: ALL
STS pb (ECAM Control panel)...................................................................................................PRESS Check the STATUS page.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-24 P 3/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
If maintenance status messages are displayed, Refer to MMEL/MI-00-08 ECAM and MAINTENANCE STATUS. Applicable to: ALL
(BRAKE FAN ).......................................................................................................................... OFF Switch off, when not required. Applicable to: ALL
PARKING BRAKE.................................................................................................................. AS RQRD The parking brake should be released after chocks are in place, if one brake temperature is above 300 °C (or above 150 °C with brake fans ON). Releasing the parking brake prevents the critical structures from being exposed to high temperature levels for an extended time. However, if operational conditions dictate (e.g. slippery tarmac), the parking brake may remain applied. When parking with a flat tire on the nose gear, keep the parking brake on, to avoid aircraft yawing at parking brake release. Applicable to: ALL
DUs...................................................................................................................................................DIM Dim EFIS, ECAM and MCDU display units. Applicable to: ALL
PARKING CHECKLIST....................................................................................................... COMPLETE 3 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, MSN 5006
REPORT SEVERE ICING CONDITIONS Report severe icing conditions in the log book, requiring inspections of the fan accoustic panels of the engines during the walkaround.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-24 P 4/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
SECURING THE AIRCRAFT Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL Prior to performing this check, COLD WEATHER should be taken into account (Refer to PRO-SUP-91-30 General). Applicable to: ALL
PARKING BRAKE PRK BRK handle.............................................................................................................CHECK ON To reduce hydraulic leak rate in the brake accumulator, keep the parking brake on. Applicable to: ALL
OXYGEN CREW SUPPLY OXYGEN CREW SUPPLY pb.....................................................................................................OFF 1 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723,
B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006
ADIRS (1+2+3) ADIRS (1+2+3)............................................................................................................................ OFF ADIRS should not be switched off during transits at latitudes above 73 °N, to avoid their requiring excessive alignment time. After having switched off the ADIRS, wait at least 10 s before switching off the electrical supply to ensure that the ADIRS memorize the latest data. 2 Applicable to: B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405,
B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
ADIRS (1+2+3) ADIRS (1+2+3)............................................................................................................................ OFF ADIRS should not be switched off during transits at latitudes above 82 °N, to avoid their requiring excessive alignment time. After having switched off the ADIRS, wait at least 10 s before switching off the electrical supply to ensure that the ADIRS memorize the latest data. Applicable to: ALL
EXTERIOR LIGHTS EXTERIOR LIGHTS.....................................................................................................................OFF CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SOP-25 P 1/2 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
Applicable to: ALL
MAINTENANCE BUS MAINT BUS sw.................................................................................................................. AS RQRD Should electrical power be required for the crew or servicing personnel, consider setting the overhead MAINT BUS sw (in the forward cabin) to the ON position, prior to setting aircraft power to off. Applicable to: ALL
APU APU BLEED pb-sw......................................................................................................................OFF APU MASTER SW pb-sw............................................................................................................OFF Switch off the APU after the passengers have disembarked. Applicable to: ALL
EMER EXIT LT selector.................................................................................................................. OFF SIGNS selector................................................................................................................................ OFF Applicable to: ALL
EXTERNAL POWER EXT PWR pb......................................................................................................................AS RQRD Applicable to: ALL
BAT 1 AND 2 BAT 1 pb-sw and BAT 2 pb-sw.................................................................................................. OFF Wait until the APU flap is fully closed (about 2 min after the APU AVAIL light goes out), before switching off the batteries. Switching the batteries off before the APU flap is closed may cause smoke in the cabin during the next flight. If the batteries are off while the APU is running, APU fire extinguishing is not available. Applicable to: ALL
SECURING THE AIRCRAFT CHECKLIST SECURING THE AIRCRAFT CHECKLIST.....................................................................COMPLETE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SOP-25 P 2/2 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
COMMUNICATIONS AND STANDARD TERMS Applicable to: ALL
Standard phraseology is essential to ensure effective crew communication. The phraseology should be concise and exact. The following Chapter lists the callouts that should be used as standard. They supplement the callouts identified in the SOP. These standard Airbus callouts are also designed to promote situational awareness, and to ensure crew understanding of systems and their use in line operation. CHECKLIST CALLOUTS Applicable to: ALL
‐ “CHECK”: A command for the other pilot to check an item. ‐ “CHECKED”: A response that an item has been checked. ‐ “CROSSCHECKED”: A callout verifying information from both pilot stations. If a checklist needs to be interrupted, announce: “HOLD CHECKLIST AT ___” and “RESUME CHECKLIST AT ___” for the continuation. Upon completion of a checklist announce: “__CHECKLIST COMPLETE”.
ACTIONS COMMANDED BY PF Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL The following commands do not necessarily initiate a guidance mode change, eg.: selected to managed/managed to selected. The intent is to ensure clear, consistent, standard communication between crewmembers. All actions performed on the FCU and MCDU must be checked on the PFD and ND (eg.: “FL 350 blue”, “FL 200 magenta"). Ensure that the correct FCU knob is used, then verify indications on the PFD/ND. SET The “SET” command means using an FCU knob to set a value, but not to change a mode. SET is accomplished by only rotating the appropriate selection knob. Example: ‐ ”SET GO AROUND ALTITUDE__” ‐ ”SET QNH __” ‐ “SET FL __” ‐ “SET HDG __” CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A to C →
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 1/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
MANAGE/PULL The “MANAGE” command means pushing an FCU knob to engage, or arm, a managed mode or target. The “PULL” command means pulling an FCU knob to engage a selected mode or target. Example: ‐ "PULL HDG 090” (HDG/TRK knob is pulled and turned). ‐ “MANAGE NAV” (HDG/TRK knob is pushed). ‐ “FL 190 PULL” (ALT knob is turned and pulled). ‐ “FL 190 MANAGE” (ALT knob is turned and pushed). ‐ “PULL SPEED 250 KNOTS” (SPD/MACH knob is pulled and turned). ‐ “MANAGE SPEED” (SPD/MACH knob is pushed). Note:
If the value was previously set, there is no requirement to repeat the figure. Simply call e.g. PULL HDG: PULL SPEED: FL PULL.
The VS/FPA knob has no managed function. The standard callouts for the use of this knob are as follows: V/S Plus (or Minus) 700 PULL, or FPA Minus 3 ° PULL (V/S/FPA knob is turned and pulled) PUSH TO LEVEL OFF (V/S/FPA knob is pushed) ARM The “ARM __” command means arming a system by pushing the specified FCU button. e.g. : “ARM APPROACH” e.g. : “ARM LOC.” ON/OFF The simple ON or OFF command is used for the autopilot, flight directors, autothrust and the bird (flight path vector). e.g.: BIRD ON (The HDG-V/S / TRK-FPA pb is pushed.) FMA Applicable to: ALL
The PF should call out any FMA change, unless specified differently (e.g. CAT II & III task sharing). Therefore, the PF should announce: ‐ All armed modes with the associated color (e.g. blue, magenta): “G/S blue”, “LOC blue”. ‐ All active modes without the associated color (e.g. green, white): “NAV”, “ALT”. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← C to D →
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 2/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
The PNF should check and respond, “CHECKED” to all FMA changes called out by the PF. ALTITUDE Applicable to: ALL
The PNF calls out “one thousand to go” when passing 1 000 ft before the cleared altitude or FL, and the PF calls out “checked”.
FLAPS OR GEAR CALLOUTS Applicable to: ALL
FLAPS' CALLOUTS FLAPS' CONFIGURATION 1 1+F 0
CALLOUT "FLAPS ONE" "FLAPS ONE" "FLAPS ZERO"
The reply will be given when selecting the new flap position. e.g.: PF
PNF
CALLOUT "FLAPS ONE" "SPEED CHECKED"
"FLAPS ONE"
REMARK PNF checks the speed: ‐ Above the S or F speed and accelerating (Takeoff) ‐ Below VFE next and decelerating (Approach) PNF selects the FLAPS lever position and replies after checking the blue number on the ECAM flaps indicator to confirm the correct selection has been made.
GEAR CALLOUTS PF PNF
CALLOUT "GEAR UP (DOWN)" "GEAR UP (DOWN)"
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
REMARKS The PNF selects the L/G lever position and replies after checking the red lights on the LDG GEAR indicator to confirm gear operation.
← D to F
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 3/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
FLIGHT PARAMETERS IN APPROACH Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
PNF will make callouts for the following conditions during final approach. Attitude callouts also to be made through to landing. ‐ “SPEED” if the speed decreases below the speed target - 5 kt or increases above the speed target + 10 kt. ‐ “SINK RATE” when V/S is greater than -1 000 ft/min. ‐ “BANK” when bank angle becomes greater than 7 °. ‐ “PITCH” when pitch attitude becomes lower than -2.5 ° or higher than +10 °. ‐ "LOC” or “GLIDE” when either localizer or glide slope deviation is: • ¼ dot LOC; 1 dot GS. ‐ “COURSE” when greater than ½ dot or 2.5 ° (VOR) or 5 ° (ADF). ‐ “__ FT HIGH (LOW)” at altitude checks points. FLIGHT PARAMETERS IN APPROACH 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
PNF will make callouts for the following conditions during final approach. Attitude callouts also to be made through to landing. ‐ “SPEED” if the speed decreases below the speed target - 5 kt or increases above the speed target + 10 kt. ‐ “SINK RATE” when V/S is greater than -1 000 ft/min. ‐ “BANK” when bank angle becomes greater than 7 °. ‐ “PITCH” when pitch attitude becomes lower than -2.5 ° or higher than +10 °. ‐ "LOC” or “GLIDE” when either localizer or glide slope deviation is: • ¼ dot LOC; 1 dot GS. ‐ “COURSE” when greater than ½ dot or 2.5 ° (VOR) or 5 ° (ADF). ‐ “__ FT HIGH (LOW)” at altitude checks points. For RNP AR approach: The PNF will make callouts for the following conditions during final approach: ‐ ”LDEV”, when LDEV is at half of RNP or 1 dot. ‐ ”VDEV”, when ½ dot deviation above or below path.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
G→
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 4/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
‐ ”SINK RATE”, when V/S is greater that -1 200 ft/min. ‐ ”BANK”, when the bank angle goes above 30 °. FLIGHT PARAMETERS IN GO-AROUND Applicable to: ALL
During a go-around, the PNF will make a callout for the following conditions: ‐ ”BANK”: If the bank angle becomes greater than 7 °, ‐ ”PITCH”: If the pitch attitude becomes greater than 20 ° up or less than 10 ° up, ‐ ”SINK RATE”: If there is no climb rate. PF/PNF DUTIES TRANSFER Applicable to: ALL
To transfer control, flight crewmembers must use the following callouts: ‐ To give control: The pilot calls out “YOU HAVE CONTROL”. The other pilot accepts this transfer by calling out “I HAVE CONTROL”, before assuming PF duties. ‐ To take control: The pilot calls out “I HAVE CONTROL”. The other pilot accepts this transfer by calling out “YOU HAVE CONTROL”, before assuming PNF duties.
ABNORMAL AND EMERGENCY CALL OUTS Applicable to: ALL
ECAM PROCEDURES 1. “ECAM ACTION” is commanded by PF when required. 2. “CLEAR __ (title of the system) ?” is asked by the PNF for confirmation by the PF, that all actions have been taken/reviewed on the present WARNING/CAUTION or SYSTEM PAGE. e.g.: CLEAR HYDRAULIC ? 3. “CLEAR __ (title of the system)” is the command by the PF that the action and review is confirmed. For status page; REMOVE STATUS will be used. 4. “ECAM ACTIONS COMPLETE” is the announcement by the PNF that all APPLICABLE ACTIONS have been completed. 5. Should the PF require an action from the PNF during ECAM procedures, the order “STOP ECAM” will be used. When ready to resume the ECAM the order “CONTINUE ECAM” will be used.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← G to J →
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 5/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
MEMORY ITEMS The aim of such callouts is to callout the appropriate procedure by calling out, in most cases, the title of the procedure. This will allow the crew to be aware of the situation and be prepared to properly react (crew coordination, task sharing and communication). GPWS As soon as avoidance manoeuver is envisaged. "PULL UP TOGA" REACTIVE WINDSHEAR "WINDSHEAR TOGA" UNRELIABLE SPEED INDICATION "UNRELIABLE SPEED" TCAS As soon as "TRAFFIC" warning is triggered "TCAS, I have control" EMERGENCY DESCENT "EMERGENCY DESCENT" LOSS OF BRAKING "LOSS OF BRAKING"
SUMMARY FOR EACH PHASE Applicable to: ALL
EVENT Initial ground contact
PF or PNF GROUND (from) COCKPIT
External __ disconnection
REMOVE EXTERNAL __
GND Mech COCKPIT (from) GROUND EXTERNAL__ REMOVED
TO REMOVE GROUND SUPPLY EVENT Before start up clearance received
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PF BEFORE START C/L
← J to K →
PNF DOWN TO THE LINE Continued on the following page
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 6/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
EVENT After start up clearance received
PF BELOW THE LINE
Continued from the previous page PNF
BEFORE START C/L COMPLETE
BEFORE ENGINE START/PUSH BACK EVENT PF When ready for pushback, and pushback GROUND (from) COCKPIT, clearance received from ATC CLEARED FOR PUSH Start of push When ready to start engines When pushback completed When ready to disconnect (after engine started, and parameters are stabilized)
BRAKES RELEASED READY TO PUSH CLEAR TO START ? STARTING ENG(S)— BRAKES SET CLEAR TO DISCONNECT (hand signals on left/right)
GND Mech. COCKPIT (from) GROUND, RELEASE BRAKES
CLEAR TO START SET BRAKES
DISCONNECTING (hand signals on left/right)
PUSH BACK/ENGINE START EVENT All engines started and stabilized and GND is disconnected
PF AFTER START C/L
PNF AFTER START C/L COMPLETE
AFTER ENGINE START EVENT When taxi clearance obtained
PF CLEAR LEFT (RIGHT) SIDE
Brake check Flight control check in the following sequence (the check is possible before the start of taxi) 1. Elevators 2. Ailerons/Spoilers 3. Rudder(1) During taxi
BRAKE CHECK FLIGHT CONTROL CHECK
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
RUDDER BEFORE TAKEOFF C/L
←K→
PNF CLEAR RIGHT (LEFT) SIDE
FULL UP, FULL DOWN, NEUTRAL FULL LEFT, FULL RIGHT, NEUTRAL FULL LEFT, FULL RIGHT, NEUTRAL DOWN TO THE LINE Continued on the following page
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 7/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
EVENT Line up on the runway (1)
PF BELOW THE LINE
The PNF should follow pedal movement with his/her feet
Continued from the previous page PNF
BEFORE TAKEOFF C/L COMPLETE
TAXI EVENT Setting thrust levers to initial stabilization TAKEOFF value Before passing 80 kt At 100 kt CHECKED At V1 At VR Gear retraction GEAR UP
PF
PNF THRUST SET ONE HUNDRED KNOTS V1 ROTATE POSITIVE CLIMB
If AP is engaged by PNF Checklist
AP 1(2) ON AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB C/L
At transition altitude
BELOW THE LINE
GEAR UP DOWN TO THE LINE AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB C/L COMPLETE
TAKEOFF
If GO decision If RTO decision
EVENT
GO STOP
CAPT
F/O
‐ REV green on EWD ‐ Deceleration (1) (2)
REVERSE GREEN(1) DECEL(2) In case of failure or no positive deceleration, NO REVERSE ENGINE__or NO REVERSE In case of failure or no positive deceleration, NO DECEL DECEL callout means that the deceleration is felt by the crew, and confirmed by the speed trend on the PFD. It can also be confirmed by the DECEL light. MALFUNCTION BEFORE V1 AT TAKEOFF
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←K→
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 8/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
EVENT Barometric setting change and subsequent altimeter cross-check
PF SET STANDARD (SET QNH/QFE) CHECKED
PNF STANDARD CROSS-CHECKED (QNH/QFE) PASSING FL__(__FT) NOW
ALTIMETER SETTING CHANGES TO/FROM QNH/QFE-STD EVENT Approach checklist
PF APPROACH C/L
Activation of approach Phase
ACTIVATE APPROACH PHASE
RA alive At “GS*” or below GO altitude for NPA FAF Landing checklist 1 000 ft RA 100 ft above MDA/DH MDA/DH visual reference MDA/DH no visual reference
CHECKED SET GA ALTITUDE __FT CHECKED LANDING C/L
(2) (3) (4) (5)
APPROACH C/L COMPLETE APPROACH PHASE ACTIVATED RADIO ALTIMETER ALIVE(1)(2) GA ALTITUDE — SET, PASSING__(Fix Name),__FT, LANDING C/L COMPLETE ONE THOUSAND(2)
CHECKED
ONE HUNDRED ABOVE
CHECKED
MINIMUM
CONTINUE GO AROUND-FLAPS
After touchdown Ground spoilers extended REV green on EWD Deceleration At 70 kt (1)
PNF
MINIMUM ONE HUNDRED FIFTY(2) SPOILERS(3) REVERSE GREEN(4) DECEL (5) SEVENTY KNOTS
CHECKED Crew awareness, crew should now keep RA in scan to landing PNF monitors pin-programmed auto callout, or announces if inoperative. If the spoilers are not extended, call NO SPOILER If no reverse deployment, call NO REVERSE ENGINE__ or NO REVERSE, as appropriate. DECEL Callout means that the deceleration is felt by the crew, and confirmed by the speed trend on the PFD. It can also be confirmed by the DECEL light. If no positive deceleration, NO DECEL. APPROACH AND LANDING
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←K→
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 9/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
EVENT GO AROUND decision Flaps retraction Gear retraction
PF GO AROUND – FLAPS
Checklist
AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB C/L
At transition altitude
BELOW THE LINE
GEAR UP
PNF FLAPS— POSITIVE CLIMB GEAR UP DOWN TO THE LINE AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB C/L COMPLETE
GO AROUND
Checklist
EVENT
PF AFTER LANDING C/L
PNF AFTER LANDING C/L COMPLETE
AFTER LANDING
Checklist
EVENT
PARKING C/L
PF
PNF PARKING C/L COMPLETE
PARKING
Checklist
EVENT
PF SECURING THE AIRCRAFT C/L
PNF SECURING THE AIRCRAFT C/L COMPLETE
SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←K
PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 10/10 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Introduction INTRODUCTION Applicable to: ALL
Note:
This chapter is an amplification of the SOP. Anytime it was feasible, the same chapters and the same titles of paragraph were retained.
The following discussion of the FMGS uses this flight plan as an example.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-05 P 1/2 20 AUG 10
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
←A
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-05 P 2/2 20 AUG 10
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Cockpit Preparation FMGS INITIALIZATION Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
CHECKING THE DATABASE CYCLE CHECK the CLOCK DATE and ADJUST, if necessary. If the date in the active database does not match the clock date, the MCDU displays “CHECK DATA BASE CYCLE”. If this message appears, check the period of validity in the second database and select it, if required.
CAUTION
Cycling the navigation database deletes the active and secondary flight plans. Do not cycle it while airborne because doing so will delete the flight plan, eliminate all speed predictions, and blank the ND. If the aircraft is in managed speed, Green Dot becomes the speed target.
CHECKING PILOT'S WAYPOINTS, NAVAIDS, RUNWAYS, OR ROUTES PRESS the DATA key. PRESS the next page key. SELECT, successively, as required: ‐ PILOTS WAYPOINTS ‐ PILOTS NAVAIDS ‐ PILOTS RUNWAYS ‐ PILOTS ROUTES CHECK the contents of each of these data storages and DELETE items, as appropriate. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 1/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
NAVAIDS DESELECTION If NOTAMS indicate that selected NAVAIDs are unreliable or unserviceable, deselect them as follows: PRESS the DATA key. SELECT the POSITION MONITOR page. SELECT the SELECTED NAVAIDS page. Under “DESELECT”, INSERT the NAVAID identifier in the brackets. The pilot can only make six deselections.
Note:
When a NAVAID is deselected, it is no more used for navigation by the FMGC during the rest of the flight. However a deselected NAVAID can still be manually tuned on the RAD NAV page and displayed on ND.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 2/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
FMGS INITIALIZATION 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
CHECKING THE DATABASE CYCLE CHECK the CLOCK DATE and ADJUST, if necessary. If the date in the active database does not match the clock date, the MCDU displays “CHECK DATA BASE CYCLE”. If this message appears, check the period of validity in the second database and select it, if required.
CAUTION
Cycling the navigation database deletes the active and secondary flight plans. Do not cycle it while airborne because doing so will delete the flight plan, eliminate all speed predictions, and blank the ND. If the aircraft is in managed speed, Green Dot becomes the speed target.
CHECKING PILOT'S WAYPOINTS, NAVAIDS, RUNWAYS, OR ROUTES PRESS the DATA key. PRESS the next page key. SELECT, successively, as required: ‐ PILOTS WAYPOINTS ‐ PILOTS NAVAIDS ‐ PILOTS RUNWAYS ‐ PILOTS ROUTES CHECK the contents of each of these data storages and DELETE items, as appropriate.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 3/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
NAVAIDS DESELECTION The flight crew can manually deselect all the RADIO NAVAIDs as follows: PRESS the DATA key. SELECT the POSITION MONITOR page. SELECT the SELECTED NAVAIDS page. Press [ 5L ] to DESELECT all the Radio NAVAIDs. If NOTAMS indicate that selected NAVAIDs are unreliable or unserviceable, deselect them as follows: PRESS the DATA key. SELECT the POSITION MONITOR page. SELECT the SELECTED NAVAIDS page. Under “DESELECT”, INSERT the NAVAID identifier in the brackets. The flight crew can only make four deselections.
Note:
When a NAVAID is deselected, it is no more used for navigation by the FMGC during the rest of the flight. However a deselected NAVAID can still be manually tuned on the RAD NAV page and displayed on ND.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 4/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT PLAN INITIALIZATION Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
GENERAL Follow SOP instructions, when the route is a company route stored in the database. Check COST INDEX. If the company route is unknown, proceed as follows:
WRITE a “FROM/TO” city pair, then ENTER it: If one or more company routes run between the cities, the ROUTE SELECTION page appears and defines them. INSERT the preferred company route. Check COST INDEX. If the database does not contain a company route: The flight plan must be constructed manually: PRESS the INIT key ENTER a city pair in the FROM/TO field. The ROUTE SELECTION page comes up with “NONE” SELECT RETURN [6L] key then construct the flight plan manually.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 5/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If waypoints, NAVAIDs or airports are not in the NAV database, the crew must define and store them manually, using the “data stored” function. 2 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
GENERAL Follow SOP instructions, when the route is a company route stored in the database. If the company route is unknown, proceed as follows:
WRITE a “FROM/TO” city pair, then ENTER it: If one or more company routes run between the cities, the ROUTE SELECTION page appears and defines them. INSERT the preferred company route. Check COST INDEX. Check/modify GND TEMP.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 6/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If the database does not contain a company route: The flight plan must be constructed manually: PRESS the INIT key ENTER a city pair in the FROM/TO field. The ROUTE SELECTION page comes up with “NONE” SELECT RETURN [6L] key then construct the flight plan manually.
If waypoints, NAVAIDs or airports are not in the NAV database, the crew must define and store them manually, using the “data stored” function. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
ALIGNING IRS PRESS the INIT key, and then the IRS INIT prompt. IRS INIT page is displayed with the airport reference point as default coordinates. If applicable, PRESS [2L] and/or [2R] and use scroll keys to adjust the latitude and/or longitude values. For example, this can be used to enter the gate precise coordinates when the aircraft is intended to fly without GPS on long segments without radio coverage. PRESS the ALIGN IRS prompt The displayed coordinates are sent to ADIRS for initialization.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 7/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If the “CHECK IRS/AIRPORT POS” message is displayed: CHECK the departure airport on INIT A page and CORRECT it if necessary. RE-ALIGN the IRS per the procedure described previously. If a new FROM or a new CO RTE is entered after IRS alignment is already completed, the “RESET IRS TO NAV” message will be triggered. In this case: CHECK IRS alignment If alignment is not correct, RE-ALIGN the IRS per the procedure described previously. Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403
ALIGNING IRS PRESS the INIT key, and then the IRS INIT prompt. IRS INIT page is displayed with the airport reference point as default coordinates. If necessary, PRESS [1L] and/or [1R] and use scroll keys to adjust the latitude and/or longitude values. For example, this can be used to enter the gate precise coordinates when the aircraft is intended to fly without GPS on long segments without radio coverage. PRESS the ALIGN ON REF prompt and CONFIRM ALIGN* prompt. The displayed coordinates are sent to ADIRS for initialization. The alignment status changes to ALIGNING ON REF. If the “CHECK IRS/AIRPORT POS” or "REF/GPS POS DIF" or "REF/LAST IRS POS DIF" message is displayed: CHECK the departure airport on INIT A page and CORRECT it if necessary. REALIGN the IRS per the procedure described previously. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 8/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If a new FROM or a new CO RTE is entered after IRS alignment is already completed, the ALIGN ON REF prompt is displayed in [6R]: REALIGN the IRS per the procedure described previously. 3 Applicable to: B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747,
B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
ALIGNING IRS The alignment phase is completed, when the ADIRS is initialized to an appropriate position. If the GPS is available, initialization is automatic, using the GPS position. Flight crew intervention is not necessary. However, automatic initialization may be manually overriden by flight crew entry, at any moment during the alignment phase. In this case, perform the following procedure as soon as possible, to prevent delays if an alignment error occurs: PRESS the INIT key, and then the IRS INIT prompt. IRS INIT page is displayed with the airport reference point as default coordinates. If necessary, PRESS [1L] and/or [1R] and use scroll keys to adjust the latitude and/or longitude values. For example, this can be used to enter the gate precise coordinates when the aircraft is intended to fly without GPS on long segments without radio coverage. PRESS the ALIGN ON REF prompt and CONFIRM ALIGN* prompt. The displayed coordinates are sent to ADIRS for initialization. The alignment status changes to ALIGNING ON REF. If the “CHECK IRS/AIRPORT POS” or "REF/GPS POS DIF" or "REF/LAST IRS POS DIF" message is displayed: CHECK the departure airport on INIT A page and CORRECT it if necessary. REALIGN the IRS per the procedure described previously. If a new FROM or a new CO RTE is entered after IRS alignment is already completed, the ALIGN ON REF prompt is displayed in [6R]: REALIGN the IRS per the procedure described previously.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 9/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
LATERAL FLIGHT PLAN SELECTING A DEPARTURE
You may use the “←” or “→” keys to gain access to the listings of runways, or the one of SIDs, and transitions. Procedure PRESS the F-PLN key on MCDU SELECT the DEPARTURE prompt [1L] key SELECT the RWY in USE, SID and TRANS CHECK and INSERT the TMPY F-PLN or continue with next revision.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 10/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
4 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
LATERAL FLIGHT PLAN SELECTING A DEPARTURE
You may use the “←” or “→” keys to gain access to the listings of runways, or the one of SIDs, and transitions. Procedure PRESS the F-PLN key on MCDU SELECT the DEPARTURE prompt [1L] key SELECT the RWY in USE, SID and TRANS CHECK and INSERT the TMPY F-PLN or continue with next revision.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 11/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
5 Applicable to: ALL
VERTICAL FLIGHT PLAN ENTERING/MODIFYING A SPEED LIMIT
PRESS the F-PLN key on the MCDU. SELECT VERTICAL REVISION at the FROM waypoint. WRITE a new speed limit/altitude and ENTER. The crew can insert one climb speed limit and one descent speed limit into the vertical flight plan, or modify or clear the limits that are already in it. The speed limit is defined by a speed and an altitude (for example, 230/9 000), which means that the managed speed target will be limited by the speed limit when the aircraft flies below the specified altitude. In both climb and descent, 250 kt at 10 000 ft is the default speed limit in the vertical flight plan. The vertical revision page presents the climb speed (CLB SPD) limit if the revised waypoint is between departure and top of descent. The vertical revision page shows the descent speed (DES SPD) limit, if the revised waypoint is between top of descent and destination. It can be deleted by a clear action, the field reverts to brackets. It can also be cleared directly on the F-PLN A page by clearing the SPD LIM pseudo-waypoint. CHECK and INSERT the TMPY F-PLN or continue with next revision.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 12/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
The speed limit cannot be cleared in the temporary flight plan. If the crew inadvertly tries to clear the SPD LIM in the TMPY F-PLN, the message “NOT ALLOWED” is displayed in the scratchpad.
ENTERING A SPEED CONSTRAINT
Procedure PRESS the F-PLN key on the MCDU. SELECT the VERT REV page at the revised waypoint. WRITE the speed constraint value into the scratchpad and ENTER it in 3L. CHECK and INSERT the TMPY F-PLN or continue with next revision.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 13/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
A speed constraint can also be entered directly on F-PLN page, without using VERT REV page.
When predictions are not yet available, the constraints are displayed on the F-PLN A page in magenta. When predictions are available, the speed constraint is highlighted by a star (*). * If the predicted speed matches the constraint, the star is magenta. * If the prediction is that the aircraft will miss the speed constraint, the star is amber. If a speed constraint cannot be met (by more than 10 kt), the FMGS generates the message “SPD ERROR AT WPT XX”. A speed constraint may be assigned to any waypoint in the climb or the descent phase except the FROM, origin, or destination waypoints, and any pseudo waypoint. When a speed constraint is assigned to a waypoint, the constraint will limit the managed speed target as follows: ‐ In takeoff or climb phase until you pass the constrained waypoint. ‐ In descent an approach phase, after passing the constrained waypoint. Speed constraints are observed by the FMGS when NAV mode and speed managed are active. ENTERING A SPEED CONSTRAINT THROUGH F-PLN A PAGE You may also enter a speed constraint through the F-PLN A page.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 14/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
You may delete the constraint using the clear key on the relevant right hand key. However if there is an altitude constraint assigned at that point, the clear action deletes it too.
ENTERING AN ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT
Procedure PRESS the F-PLN key on the MCDU. SELECT the “VERT REV” page at the revised waypoint. WRITE an altitude constraint in the scratchpad and ENTER it in 3R. If ← CLB and DES → prompt are displayed, SELECT the type of constraint. The system displays the ← CLB or DES → prompt, when the predictions are not yet available, or when the waypoint is part of the cruise phase as originally defined. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 15/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
CHECK and INSERT the TMPY F-PLN or continue with next revision Note:
1. In case of QFE operations, the altitude constraints defined in heights (QFE) must be converted and entered in the FMS as altitudes (QNH). 2. An altitude constraint can also be entered directly on F-PLN page, without using VERT REV page.
You or the database may assign an altitude constraint to any waypoint in the climb or descent phases except the FROM, origin, or destination waypoints, or any pseudo waypoint. An altitude constraint may be defined as an “at”, an “at or above”, or an “at or below” constraint. In certain procedures, the database may define an altitude constraint as a window in which the aircraft should fly. Enter “AT” constraints with no sign. Enter “AT or ABOVE” constraints preceded by a + sign (+FL 130, for example). Enter “AT or BELOW” constraints preceded by a – sign (-15 000, for example). enter four or five-digit number when entering altitude. Include the lead zero (0 500 ft , for example). For flight level, enter a two- or three-digit number, with or without the letters “FL”. The lead zero is optional. (Examples : +FL 120 or + 120 ; -FL 090 or -90 or - 090) Enter the altitude value as either altitude or flight level ; the MCDU displays the selected value as an “ALT” or “FL,” as appropriate for the transition altitude. The constraint must be higher than the thrust reduction altitude and lower than the cruise flight level. Once inserted in the flight plan, the altitude constraint (ALT CSTR) is displayed in magenta as long as predictions are not available. When predictions are available, the altitude constraints are replaced by the predicted altitude at relevant waypoints highlighted by a star. * If the predicted altitude matches the constraint the star is magenta. If the predicted altitude is missed (by more than 250 ft), the star is amber.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 16/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
The vertical revision page displays “ALT ERROR”, along with the difference between the constraint and the predicted altitude at the revised waypoint.
ND Display An altitude-constrained waypoint is marked by a circle ( ) on the navigation display. This circle is white when the guidance does not take the altitude constraint into account. It is magenta if the guidance system takes the altitude constraint into account and predicts that it will be matched. It is amber if the guidance system takes the altitude constraint into account and predicts that it will not be matched.
The aircraft should be at or below FL 120 at AGN and above FL 180 at LACOU.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 17/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Entering an Altitude Constraint Through F-PLN A Page The pilot may also enter an altitude constraint directly through the F-PLN A page. When entering the value into the scratchpad do not forget the slash e.g. /- 120 or /-FL 120. If the slash is omitted the value will be considered as a speed constraint if it is within the range value.
Use CLR to delete them directly from the flight plan page, as well. However, if there is also a speed constraint assigned at that waypoint, the clear action deletes it too. ENTERING AN ESTIMATED TAKEOFF TIME (ETT) In Preflight Phase: SELECT the SEC F-PLN key on the MCDU. SELECT a VERT REV at any waypoint. SELECT the Required Time of Arrival (RTA) prompt (2R). The MCDU displays the RTA page. ENTER the Estimated Takeoff Time in the [ 5R ] field. The format is HHMMSS (entry of seconds is not mandatory).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 18/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If the aircraft has not taken off by the time entered as estimated takeoff time, the MCDU displays the “CLK IS TAKE OFF TIME” message, meaning that the system will replace your estimated takeoff time with the actual time. When beginning the takeoff roll, the system automatically adopts that clock time as the takeoff time. If the origin airport is changed, or the clock time is invalid, the system automatically deletes the estimated takeoff time. Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT PLAN CHECK CHECK the EOSID on the ND plan mode (yellow line). Note:
If the details of the EOSID require review, select the EOSID as a TMPY F-PLN and review it as TMPY. Then ERASE it.
Applicable to: ALL
SECONDARY F-PLN For details : Refer to DSC-22_20-60-50 Secondary Flight Plan. Applicable to: ALL
RADIO NAV Whenever a NAVAID IDENT is correctly decoded, in agreement with that published, no audio check is necessary. Morse decoding is displayed on the ND for VOR/DME, VOR/TAC, DME, ADF, and on the PFD for ILS. Preferably use the identifier for NAVAID entry. If the ADF IDENT is not in the database, be sure to include a decimal point when tuning the frequency (e.g 315. or 325.7).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 19/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Whenever, the runway ILS is intented to be retained for guidance after the takeoff phase, it is recommended to manually tune the ILS by its identifier.
FMGS DATA INSERTION Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
WEIGHT/CG INSERTION AND FUEL PLANNING The flight crew must enter the Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) and Zero Fuel Weight Center of Gravity (ZFWCG) values on the INIT B page, to allow the FMS to perform the fuel planning computations.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to C →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 20/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
PROCEDURE PRESS the INIT key, and the Next (“→”) key to access the INIT B page. ENTER the ZFW and ZFWCG value in the [ 1R ] field. The “FUEL PLANNING →” prompt appears in the [ 3R ] field. Note:
As long as the final load sheet is not available, the crew should insert the estimated ZFW/ZFWCG in order to get fuel estimates. The ZFW and ZFWCG values must be updated with the final load sheet values.
CHECK/MODIFY the TAXI [ 1L ], RTE RSV [ 3L ] and FINAL TIME [ 5L ] values. The TAXI, RTE RSV and FINAL TIME fields display the default values specified in the AMI file (for example, “0.4 t” for TAXI, “5.0 %” for RTE RSV and "0045" for FINAL TIME). The flight crew may modify these values. Note:
At takeoff, the RTE RSV field will automatically be reset to 0. The RTE RSV fuel is then added to the EXTRA fuel, which ensures that the EXTRA fuel and MIN DEST FOB values are consistent in flight.
ENTER an ALTN fuel value in the [4L] field, as necessary. The flight crew may enter the ALTN fuel value planned on the Computerized Flight Plan (CFP), as necessary.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 21/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
ENTER the TRIP WIND value in the [ 6R ] field, as necessary. In no wind profile has been entered in the F-PLN, the crew may enter an average TRIP WIND in this field, to obtain more realistic fuel/time predictions before departure. Note:
1. The flight crew should only enter a TRIP WIND to obtain realistic fuel/time predictions, on ground. Then, the flight crew should enter a wind profile using the WIND pages, for fuel/time predictions in flight. As soon as flight crew has entered a wind profile on the WIND pages, the TRIP WIND will be erased. 2. If the crew has already defined a wind profile, even partially (such as climb wind), it is not possible to enter a TRIP WIND.
ENTER the planned BLOCK fuel, as indicated in the computerized flight plan (CFP). If the planned BLOCK fuel is not available, the crew may obtain a prediction of the minimum BLOCK fuel required for the flight by pressing the FUEL PLANNING prompt [3R]. Pressing this prompt makes the FMS compute the minimum required BLOCK fuel, which is the BLOCK fuel required to have EXTRA fuel = 0, based on the parameters entered on the INIT and F-PLN pages. The computed BLOCK fuel value is displayed in the [2R] field, and a BLOCK CONFIRM prompt appears in the [3R] field. Note:
In order to obtain a realistic BLOCK fuel computation, the flight crew should ensure that the F-PLN initialization has been completed (including insertion of the ALTN F-PLN and/or ALTN fuel, if necessary), and that flight parameters, such as CRZ FL, steps climbs (if any), and winds, have been inserted, before using the FUEL PLANNING function.
When the final Load and Trim Sheet (LTS) data are available:
ENTER the final ZFW/ZFWCG [1R], and the required BLOCK fuel [2R]. The FMS computes the predictions, based on the entered BLOCK fuel, and estimates the EXTRA fuel value.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 22/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
CHECK the resulting computed data, against the data planned on the CFP: TRIP fuel, RTE RSV fuel, ALTN fuel, FINAL and EXTRA fuel values. If necessary, the flight crew may modify the ALTN or FINAL fuel values. PRINT the PREFLIGHT REPORT, if necessary. When the final load sheet values (ZFW/ZFWCG/BLOCK) have been entered, the crew may print the pre-flight report, which provides a copy of the F-PLN with the associated FMS predictions. 6 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
WEIGHT/CG INSERTION AND FUEL PLANNING The flight crew must enter the Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW) and Zero Fuel Weight Center of Gravity (ZFWCG) values on the INIT B page, to allow the FMS to perform the fuel planning computations.
PROCEDURE PRESS the INIT key, and the Next (“→”) key to access the INIT B page. ENTER the ZFW and ZFWCG value in the [ 1R ] field. The “FUEL PLANNING →” prompt appears in the [ 3R ] field. Note:
As long as the final load sheet is not available, the crew should insert the estimated ZFW/ZFWCG in order to get fuel estimates. The ZFW and ZFWCG values must be updated with the final load sheet values.
CHECK/MODIFY the TAXI [ 1L ], RTE RSV [ 3L ] and FINAL TIME [ 5L ] values. The TAXI, RTE RSV and FINAL TIME fields display the default values specified in the AMI file (for example, “0.4 t” for TAXI, “5.0 %” for RTE RSV and "0045" for FINAL TIME). The flight crew may modify these values.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 23/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
At takeoff, the RTE RSV field will automatically be reset to 0. The RTE RSV fuel is then added to the EXTRA fuel, which ensures that the EXTRA fuel and MIN DEST FOB values are consistent in flight.
ENTER an ALTN fuel value in the [4L] field, as necessary. The flight crew may enter the ALTN fuel value planned on the Computerized Flight Plan (CFP), as necessary. ENTER a MIN DEST FOB value in the [6L] field, as necessary. Note:
MIN DEST FOB (equal to ALTN + FINAL) can be increased at flight crew discretion (e.g. when HOLD is expected at destination).
ENTER the TRIP WIND value in the [ 5R ] field, as necessary. In no wind profile has been entered in the F-PLN, the crew may enter an average TRIP WIND in this field, to obtain more realistic fuel/time predictions before departure. Note:
1. The flight crew should only enter a TRIP WIND to obtain realistic fuel/time predictions, on ground. Then, the flight crew should enter a wind profile using the WIND pages, for fuel/time predictions in flight. As soon as flight crew has entered a wind profile on the WIND pages, the TRIP WIND will be erased. 2. If the crew has already defined a wind profile, even partially (such as climb wind), it is not possible to enter a TRIP WIND.
ENTER the planned BLOCK fuel, as indicated in the computerized flight plan (CFP) If the planned BLOCK fuel is not available, the crew may obtain a prediction of the minimum BLOCK fuel required for the flight by pressing the FUEL PLANNING prompt [3R]. Pressing this prompt makes the FMS compute the minimum required BLOCK fuel, which is the BLOCK fuel required to have EXTRA fuel = 0, based on the parameters entered on the INIT and F-PLN pages. The computed BLOCK fuel value is displayed in the [2R] field, and a BLOCK CONFIRM prompt appears in the [3R] field. Note:
In order to obtain a realistic fuel computation, the flight crew should ensure that the F-PLN initialization has been completed (including insertion of the ALTN F-PLN and/or ALTN fuel and/or MIN DEST FOB if necessary), and that flight parameters, such as CRZ FL, steps climbs (if any), and winds, have been inserted.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 24/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
When the final Load and Trim Sheet (LTS) data are available:
ENTER the final ZFW/ZFWCG [1R], and the required BLOCK fuel [2R]. The FMS computes the predictions, based on the entered BLOCK fuel, and estimates the EXTRA fuel value. CHECK the resulting computed data, against the data planned on the CFP: TRIP fuel, RTE RSV fuel, ALTN fuel, FINAL and EXTRA fuel values. If necessary, the flight crew may modify the ALTN or FINAL fuel values. PRINT the PREFLIGHT REPORT, if necessary. When the final load sheet values (ZFW/ZFWCG/BLOCK) have been entered, the crew may print the pre-flight report, which provides a copy of the F-PLN with the associated FMS predictions. Applicable to: ALL
TAKEOFF WITH NO WEIGHT/CG DATA If the crew does not enter ZFW/ZFWCG data prior takeoff, or if the FMGC looses these values due to a power interruption, the following will occur: ‐ At takeoff, the Speed Reference System (SRS) mode is available (provided a V2 has been inserted) ‐ When the aircraft leaves the SRS mode, the target speed becomes the current speed and reverts to selected. Note:
If the AP/FD has reverted to ALT or V/S (FPA) mode, the associated A/THR mode is SPEED. In this case, the system will probably reduce thrust, because the speed will be equal to, or greater than, the target speed.
When appropriate, to regain FMS predictions and associated managed modes: INSERT the ZFW/ZFWCG values on the FUEL PRED page.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 25/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: ALL
INSERTING WEIGHT/CG DATA AFTER ENGINE START The flight crew must enter the ZFW/ZFWCG values on INIT B page prior to engine start. If these data have not been entered at engine start, the MCDU displays the “INITIALIZE WEIGHTS” amber message in the scratchpad. After engine start, the crew should enter the ZFW/ZFWCG values on the FUEL PRED page. PRESS to the FUEL PRED key. INSERT the ZFW/ZFWCG values in the [4R] field. This allows predictions and performance computation. CHECK the resulting computed data, against the data planned on the CFP: TRIP fuel, RTE RSV fuel, ALTN fuel, FINAL and EXTRA fuel values. If necessary, the flight crew may modify the ALTN or FINAL fuel values. PRINT the PREFLIGHT REPORT, if necessary. When the final load sheet values (ZFW/ZFWCG/BLOCK) have been entered, the crew may print the pre-flight report, which provides a copy of the F-PLN with the associated FMS predictions.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 26/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: ALL
TAKEOFF DATA INSERTION
PROCEDURE PRESS the PERF key on the MCDU. WRITE successively and ENTER : V1, VR, V2. WRITE successively and ENTER T.O. SHIFT and FLX TEMP or DRT TO CHECK/MODIFY the THR RED ALT (Thrust reduction altitude) See *. CHECK/MODIFY the ACC ALT (acceleration altitude) See *. CHECK/MODIFY the ENG OUT ACC (engine out acceleration altitude) See *. CHECK/MODIFY the TRANS ALT (transition altitude) See * CHECK V1, V2 on PFD See ** * Altitudes less than 400 ft above airfield elevation cannot be selected. ** If the PFD does not display V2 at the top of its speed scale, check that at least one FD is ON.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 27/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
ENTERING A FLEX TEMPERATURE WRITE the desired flex temperature in the scratchpad and ENTER using the [4R] key.
7 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
CLIMB SPEED PRESELECTION If the managed speeds for the initial climb are not suitable, the pilot can preselect an appropriate climb speed on the “PERF CLB” page, as long as the climb phase is not active. The CLB SPD preselection applies, when the: ‐ ATC specifies an initial climb speed. ‐ Initial climb speed must be lower than normal because: • There are to be turns greater than 120 ° in the initial climb out. • Obstacle clearance, or some other situation, requires a high climb angle. • The airfield has a risk area to be quickly cleared (birds reported, for example).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 28/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
PROCEDURE PRESS the PERF key on the MCDU. The PERF TAKE OFF page is displayed. SELECT the PERF CLB page by pressing [6 R] (“NEXT PHASE” prompt). WRITE a climb speed and ENTER it. To revert to managed speed, select MANAGED by pressing [3L]. When the aircraft is transitioning into the climb phase, the preselected value becomes the target speed: ‐ The selected speed target is active. ‐ The primary flight display shows the target speed in blue. ‐ The FCU’s speed window displays the new speed or Mach number. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
CLIMB SPEED PRESELECTION If the managed speeds for the initial climb are not suitable, the pilot can preselect an appropriate climb speed on the “PERF CLB” page, as long as the climb phase is not active. The CLB SPD preselection applies, when the: ‐ ATC specifies an initial climb speed. ‐ Initial climb speed must be lower than normal because: • There are to be turns greater than 120 ° in the initial climb out. • Obstacle clearance, or some other situation, requires a high climb angle. • The airfield has a risk area to be quickly cleared (birds reported, for example).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 29/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
PROCEDURE PRESS the PERF key on the MCDU. The PERF TAKE OFF page is displayed. SELECT the PERF CLB page by pressing [6 R] (“NEXT PHASE” prompt). WRITE a climb speed and ENTER it. To revert to managed speed, select MANAGED by pressing [3L]. When the aircraft is transitioning into the climb phase, the preselected value becomes the target speed: ‐ The selected speed target is active. ‐ The primary flight display shows the target speed in blue. ‐ The FCU’s speed window displays the new speed or Mach number. Applicable to: ALL
CRUISE MACH (SPEED) PRESELECTION The pilot preselects a cruise Mach, when a Mach number other than the ECON cruise Mach number is required. When the aircraft transitions to the cruise phase, the speed target symbol goes to the preselected value and “SELECTED” becomes the active speed mode (blue target on PFD, target MACH shown in the speed/Mach window of the FCU).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 30/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
PROCEDURE PRESS the PERF key on the MCDU. PRESS the “NEXT PHASE” [6R] key on the MCDU, until the CRZ page is accessed. WRITE a cruise Mach (or speed) in the scratchpad and ENTER it in [4L]. To revert to managed speed, PRESS [3L]. When the cruise phase is active, you cannot preselect a cruise Mach or speed. Applicable to: ALL
ENTERING A HEADING/TRACK PRESET FUNCTION The heading/track preset allows the pilot to preset a takeoff or go-around heading or track before commanding the aircraft to take up that heading or track (manual activation). The flight crew can enter a heading or a track preset while the aircraft is on the ground and until takeoff.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 31/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
PROCEDURE Before takeoff : SET the appropriate HDG or TRK in the FCU window. This disarms the navigation mode and allows the runway mode to remain engaged after takeoff. After takeoff : PULL HDG/TRK selector knob. The heading or track mode engages on the preset value.
The direction in which the pilot rotates the HDG/TRK selection knob usually determines the direction of the turn. A left rotation (decreasing heading) produces a left turn ; a right rotation produces a right turn. However, when a heading has been preset before takeoff or go-around, the direction of the turn will be such as to cause the shortest turn at the moment of engagement. CANCELLING THE HEADING/TRACK PRESET FUNCTION The pilot can cancel the heading preset by pushing the HDG/TRK selector knob back in again. This engages or arms the NAV mode. FMGS RE-INITIALIZATION AFTER A CANCELED FLIGHT Applicable to: ALL
If the flight crew initially prepared a flight with all the data associated with this flight (takeoff speeds, winds, etc.), and if this flight is later canceled and replaced by another flight, the flight crew may use the following procedure to initialize the FMGS again:
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← C to D →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 32/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
PREPARE the new flight data in the secondary flight plan, using SEC INIT A, SEC INIT B, and SEC PERF pages ACTIVATE the secondary flight plan. Note:
When the flight crew activates the secondary flight plan, the following data of the primary flight plan is lost if the secondary flight plan does not include any replacement data: ‐ Alternate data ‐ Winds and cruise TEMP at waypoints as inserted on CRZ WIND pages ‐ Departure and arrival selection (STAR, APP, RWY) and approach parameters (QNH, TEMP, WIND, TRANS ALT, VAPP, minimum, LDG CONF) ‐ Altitude, speed, and time constraints ‐ Steps ‐ CMS ‐ Offsets ‐ Flaps/THS ‐ Preselected cruise and descent speeds.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 33/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 P 34/34 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Before Pushback or Start CHANGE OF RUNWAY Applicable to: ALL
PRESS the F-PLN key on the MCDU. SELECT the LAT REV at origin. SELECT the DEPARTURE prompt [1L]. SELECT the new RWY in use. The "CHECK TAKE-OFF DATA" message is displayed. CHECK/SELECT the appropriate SID and TRANS. CHECK and INSERT the TMPY F-PLN, or continue with next revision. PRESS the PERF key to access PERF TAKEOFF page. CHECK the V1, VR, V2 and FLEX values displayed after the amber boxes. If these values are correct, PRESS [6R] to confirm and insert them. Else, ENTER new values.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-15 P 1/2 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ENTER the new V1, VR, V2, FLEX TEMP or CONF, as appropriate. The previously-entered values, adjacent to the boxes, may be re-selected by pressing the CONFIRM TO DATA* on [6R]. Note:
In case of a runway change, any previous lateral modification performed on the active DEPARTURE procedure may lead to additional waypoint stacking in the temporary F-PLN. The crew has to check and revise it, as necessary. Refer to DSC-22_20-30-10-18 Changing the Departure/Arrival. TAKEOFF FROM INTERSECTION
Applicable to: ALL
Use RTOW or FCOM to revise takeoff parameters : PRESS the [PERF] key on MCDU ENTER the takeoff shift ENTER the new V1, VR, V2, FLX TEMP, or CONF, as appropriate Note:
The insertion of the shift in takeoff position permits the system to make an accurate revision to its navigation data at takeoff.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← A to B
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-15 P 2/2 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Taxi FCU SELECTION FOR TAKEOFF Applicable to: ALL
PROCEDURE ENSURE that HDG – V/S modes are selected (change over pb). CONFIRM or SELECT the first cleared altitude CROSS CHECK on PFD the target altitude CONFIRM both FDs ON FMA MODE CHECK Applicable to: ALL
CHECK that the FMA CLB (or ALT) mode is armed
Note:
ALT (in blue or magenta) may be displayed instead of CLB if the FCU altitude or a constraint is set at or below the acceleration altitude.
Note:
If a radar-vector standard instrument departure (SID) has been selected, a F-PLN discontinuity immediately follows the departure runway, and NAV mode is not armed. After takeoff, RWY TRK mode engages until the crew selects a HDG or performs a DIR TO.
If a HDG/TRK was preset, NAV is disarmed. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A to B →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-20 P 1/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SELECTING A NAVIGATION DISPLAY Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
SET the minimum range to display the first waypoint after departure or as required for weather radar.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to C →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-20 P 2/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SELECTING A NAVIGATION DISPLAY 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
SET the minimum range to display the first waypoint after departure or as required for weather radar.
SELECTING TAKEOFF DISPLAYS FOR PILOT'S AND COPILOT'S MCDU Applicable to: ALL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← C to D
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-20 P 3/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-20 P 4/4 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Takeoff MONITORING THE TAKEOFF Applicable to: ALL
At power set (thrust levers in FLX or TOGA position) CHECK that the navigation is updated to the runway threshold by verifying that the aircraft symbol is centered on the runway threshold of the navigation display. CHECK the FMA for appropriate mode selection Note:
‐ RWY mode appears if an ILS is tuned to a station corresponding to the departure runway. Otherwise no lateral mode comes up until the aircraft has lifted off.
At 30 ft If NAV is armed, it engages automatically. If NAV is not armed, RWY TRK mode engages and remains displayed until the crew selects another lateral mode.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 P 1/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
At 100 ft Engage AP1 or AP2. The FMGS has an internal delay that prevents the AP from engaging 5 s after liftoff and if the aircraft is below 100 ft. At thrust reduction altitude “LVR CLB” flashes in the first column of the FMA
Procedure SET the thrust levers to the CL detent A/THR activates automatically CHECK that A/THR turns to white in the 5th FMA column. CHECK that THR CLB appears in green in the first column.
Depending on the next level off altitude, CLB or ALT is armed and displayed in the second column. ALT is armed: ‐ in blue if the next predicted level-off is the FCU-selected altitude (target altitude blue at the top of the ALT scale) ‐ in magenta if the next predicted level-off is an ALT CSTR (target altitude magenta at the top of the ALT scale) CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 P 2/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
At acceleration altitude The vertical phase automatically switches to climb. CLB mode engages. The target speed jumps to initial climb speed on the PFD.
Procedure CHECK that “CLB” appears in green in the second FMA column. ‐ The speed reference system (SRS) mode remains engaged until CLB phase is engaged, which occurs at ACCEL ALT or at any other vertical mode engagement, whichever comes first. ‐ If during takeoff the FCU altitude is set below the current aircraft altitude, the system ignores the FCU altitude and the aircraft remains in SRS mode until the pilot selects an altitude above the aircraft altitude or engages any other mode. PRESELECTING A HDG OR A TRK Applicable to: ALL
PROCEDURE If a HDG or a TRK was preselected on the ground : PULL OUT the HDG/TRK selector knob when required CHECK that the HDG/TRK mode is active and displayed on the FMA When a HDG or TRK is preset, OP CLB mode will engage at the acceleration altitude. (CLB mode is not available in HDG/TRK mode).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← A to B
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 P 3/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
NORMAL TAKEOFF PROFILE Applicable to: ALL
NO FLIGHT DIRECTOR TAKEOFF Applicable to: ALL
If a takeoff is initiated without FDs, the system responds as follow: ‐ There are no FD bars. ‐ There is no A/THR arming. ‐ There is no guidance available.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
C to D →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 P 4/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
‐ The target speed on the PFD is that selected on the FCU or is defaulted to 100 kt. ‐ Setting the thrust levers to the CL detent does not activate A/THR. Note:
Do not engage the autothrust prior to selecting a target speed on the FCU.
PROCEDURE Establish initial climb of 15 ° When reaching the thrust reduction altitude (THR RED ALT): SELECT a climb speed. SET the thrust levers to CL detent. ACTIVATE the autothrust. TURN ON the FDs (basic modes engage). SELECT appropriate mode.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 P 5/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Failure of both FDs after the start of takeoff: ‐ The FD bars disappear. ‐ The FCU window displays the target speed, which synchronizes on V2, or the current speed (if it is higher). ‐ The autothrust remains armed. ‐ At thrust reduction altitude, LVR CLB flashes. If the pilot set the thrust levers to the CLB detent, the autothrust becomes active in selected SPD mode (no FDs selected). If the current speed is greater than the target speed, the thrust decreases. ‐ At acceleration altitude the target speed does not change, since it is selected. TAKEOFF WITH NO V2 ENTRY Applicable to: ALL
If V2 is not inserted, the speed reference system (SRS) will not engage for takeoff. Five seconds after lift off, V/S mode will engage. When V/S engages the current airspeed becomes the FCU target speed. To regain a normal speed target, the pilot must : SELECT the appropriate climb speed on the FCU and PULL out the knob. At ACC ALT : PUSH the A/THR pushbutton on the FCU. SET the thrust levers to CL detent. PUSH in the SPD selector knob to get a managed speed target. TAKEOFF USING THE LOCALIZER OF THE OPPOSITE RUNWAY Applicable to: ALL
If the localizer, of the ILS associated with the opposite runway, must be used for takeoff: SELECT the RAD NAV PAGE. ENTER the ILS IDENT. If the ILS is in the database, the system tunes the proper frequency. Check that the ILS front course is displayed in the CRS field. Note:
This may trigger the “RWY/ILS MISMATCH” message. Disregard it.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← D to F →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 P 6/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If the ILS is not in the database: SET the appropriate frequency, and SET the ILS front course in the CRS field.
DESELECT the" LS" pushbutton on the FCU. Since the PFD displays reverse deviation. DESELECT the LS pushbutton on ISIS. Since ISIS displays LOC reverse deviation. SELECT ROSE-ILS on one ND.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 P 7/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 P 8/8 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Climb MONITORING THE CLIMB PHASE Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
The PF MCDU should display the PERF CLB page allowing him to monitor the climb. The PNF MCDU should display the F-PLN page to allow the pilot to monitor time, speed and altitude predictions. This page also displays matched or missed information for constraints.
CHECK vertical mode CLB if NAV is engaged. CHECK vertical mode OP CLB if HDG/TRK is engaged. MONITORING THE ND (ROSE NAV OR ARC) Displays the lateral and vertical paths, in the current AP/FD active modes.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 1/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
MONITORING THE AP/FD MODES AND FMA If CLB mode is engaged, the flight mode annunciator (FMA) and the navigation display (ND) show the tactical situation as follows: CASE 1 The FCU selected altitude is set above the next altitude constraint
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 2/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
CASE 2 The FCU selected altitude is set at the next altitude constraint The aircraft will automatically levels off at this altitude.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 3/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
To resume the climb automatically when the waypoint AAA is reached, apply the following procedure during the level off (Position 4): SELECT the FCU altitude to the next constraint (if any) or the cruise FL. PUSH the FCU ALT selector knob to arm CLB mode.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 4/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
RECOMMENDATION: To ensure that you will not miss the next constraint, it is recommended to select the FCU altitude to the next constraint as described above. MONITORING THE CONSTRAINTS SPEED, ALTITUDE and TIME constraint can be checked using MCDUs. Each constraint is preceded by a star that indicates if the constraint is matched (magenta star) or missed (amber star).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 5/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT If an altitude constraint is predicted as missed, use the following procedure: SET the FCU ALT to the next ALT CSTR CHECK the position of the level off symbol on the ND (blue arrow) with respect to the waypoint with the constraint. DECREASE the target speed until the constraint is met. SPEED CONSTRAINT CHECK the SPD CSTR predictions on the MCDU. A magenta or amber star (*) indicates that the aircraft will match or miss the constraint. If the aircraft is to miss the constraint by more than 10 kt, the MCDU scratchpad displays “SPD ERROR AT WPT ---- ”. “CHECK WEIGHT” MESSAGE. Refer to PRO-SUP-22-10-C Other Abnormal Procedures - "CHECK WEIGHT" Message HDG/TRK MODE ENGAGEMENT If HDG/TRK is engaged, the guidance does not consider any F-PLN constraint. Therefore if the flight crew disengages NAV, CLB mode reverts to OP CLB.
SPEED SELECTION If a specific speed is required: TURN and PULL the SPD selector knob. (This changes the target speed to blue on the PFD speed scale). Predictions on the F-PLN page assume that the speed remains selected until the next SPD LIM or SPD CSTR, or the next phase, whichever comes first.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 6/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
MONITORING THE CLIMB PHASE 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
The PF MCDU should display the PERF CLB page allowing him to monitor the climb. The PNF MCDU should display the F-PLN page to allow the pilot to monitor time, speed and altitude predictions. This page also displays matched or missed information for constraints.
CHECK vertical mode CLB if NAV is engaged. CHECK vertical mode OP CLB if HDG/TRK is engaged. MONITORING THE ND (ROSE NAV OR ARC) Displays the lateral and vertical paths, in the current AP/FD active modes.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 7/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
MONITORING THE AP/FD MODES AND FMA If CLB mode is engaged, the flight mode annunciator (FMA) and the navigation display (ND) show the tactical situation as follows: CASE 1 The FCU selected altitude is set above the next altitude constraint
CASE 2 The FCU selected altitude is set at the next altitude constraint CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 8/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
The aircraft will automatically levels off at this altitude.
To resume the climb automatically when the waypoint AAA is reached, apply the following procedure during the level off (Position 4): SELECT the FCU altitude to the next constraint (if any) or the cruise FL. PUSH the FCU ALT selector knob to arm CLB mode.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 9/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
RECOMMENDATION: To ensure that you will not miss the next constraint, it is recommended to select the FCU altitude to the next constraint as described above. MONITORING THE CONSTRAINTS SPEED, ALTITUDE and TIME constraint can be checked using MCDUs. Each constraint is preceded by a star that indicates if the constraint is matched (magenta star) or missed (amber star).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 10/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT If an altitude constraint is predicted as missed, use the following procedure: SET the FCU ALT to the next ALT CSTR CHECK the position of the level off symbol on the ND (blue arrow) with respect to the waypoint with the constraint. DECREASE the target speed until the constraint is met.
SPEED CONSTRAINT CHECK the SPD CSTR predictions on the MCDU. A magenta or amber star (*) indicates that the aircraft will match or miss the constraint. If the aircraft is to miss the constraint by more than 10 kt, the MCDU scratchpad displays “SPD ERROR AT WPT ---- ”. “CHECK WEIGHT” MESSAGE. Refer to PRO-SUP-22-10-C Other Abnormal Procedures - "CHECK WEIGHT" Message HDG/TRK MODE ENGAGEMENT If HDG/TRK is engaged, the guidance does not consider any F-PLN constraint. Therefore if the flight crew disengages NAV, CLB mode reverts to OP CLB.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 11/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SPEED SELECTION If a specific speed is required: TURN and PULL the SPD selector knob. (This changes the target speed to blue on the PFD speed scale). Predictions on the F-PLN page assume that the speed remains selected until the next SPD LIM or SPD CSTR, or the next phase, whichever comes first. EXPEDITE CLIMB Applicable to: ALL
The flight may use the expedite mode temporarily to clear a specified altitude or to match a constraint. PRESS EXPED pb on the FCU. The AP acquires and maintains Green Dot speed. There is no benefit to use expedite mode above FL 250. The mach corresponding to green dot is too low to maintain an increased vertical speed.
To revert to normal climb: PUSH ALT knob CLB mode will engage.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← A to B →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 12/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
Pulling ALT knob or V/S knob or SPD/MACH knob also disengages EXPEDITE. PRESSING EXPED pb never disengages the mode. IMMEDIATE RETURN TO ORIGIN AIRPORT
Applicable to: ALL
If the SEC F-PLN has been prepared for an immediate return to the airport of origin: REVERT to HDG mode, then ACTIVATE the SEC F-PLN. PERFORM a DIR TO the appropriate waypoint. If the SEC F-PLN has not been prepared for an immediate return to the airport of origin:
PERFORM a lateral revision at TO waypoint ENTER the departure airport ident in the NEW DEST field. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to C →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 13/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
PERFORM a lateral revision at the new destination SELECT: APPR – STAR – VIA – TRANS and INSERT CHECK and INSERT the TMPY F-PLN or continue with next revision. When cleared to divert : PERFORM a DIR TO the suitable waypoint. ENTER QNH, WIND, minimum, LDG CONF. CHECK RAD NAV page.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 P 14/14 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Cruise REACHING CRUISE FLIGHT LEVEL Applicable to: ALL
On reaching the cruise flight level, the flight crew should be sure that the FMA displays “ALT CRZ” in its second column, which ensures that the aircraft is at cruise flight level and at Economy Cruise Mach (ECON CRZ MACH).
The FMGS engages the “soft altitude” (SOFT ALT) mode 2 min after the cruise flight level is captured and Mach stabilized. (SOFT ALT) mode allows the aircraft to deviate ± 50 ft from the target altitude to minimize the thrust variation and reduce the fuel consumption. If the FMA does not display ALT CRZ at the assigned flight level, soft altitude mode will not engage and the predictions will be computed at the preplanned flight level. This will occur when the ATC assigned flight level is lower than the preplanned flight level entered on the PROG page. If the FMA does not display ALT CRZ at the assigned FL (as may occur when the ATC-assigned FL is lower than the preplanned FL selected initially): PRESS the [PROG] key. ENTER the current cruise flight level. Note:
If the current cruise flight level is above the preplanned FL, selecting the FCU updates it automatically.
“SET SPD AUTO” (OR “SET MANAGED SPD”) If the climb phase was flown in selected speed and if the cruise phase is planned to be flown in managed speed (ECON MACH/SPEED) , “SET SPD AUTO” (or “SET MANAGED SPEED”) appears on the PFD and MCDU as a reminder. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 1/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
PRESS the FCU speed selector knob to activate the managed Mach.
MONITORING THE NAVIGATION ACCURACY Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL On aircraft equipped with GPS PRIMARY, the navigation accuracy check is not required as long as GPS PRIMARY is available. Otherwise, navigation accuracy shall be checked periodically in cruise. The PROG page displays an estimated accuracy as being high or low (center of sixth line): ‐ “HIGH” means that the FMGS estimates the FM position accurate enough to meet the EN ROUTE criteria ‐ “LOW” means that the pilot must compare raw data from tuned navaids with corresponding data computed by FM and shown on the ND or MCDU PROG page. The appearance of the message “NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD” on the MCDU calls for a similar crosscheck. Note:
The pilot should make such a comparison periodically, even if the PROG page is displaying “HIGH” and navaids are available: this allows him to quantify the FM position error.
The method for checking the accuracy is explained in the SOP and in Evaluation of position accuracy chapter (Refer to DSC-22_20-20-20 General). A quick check is explained here below when the TO waypoint is a DME type. (VOR/DME or VOR/TAC or DME or TAC)
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← A to B →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 2/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
POSITION DISCREPANCY If there is a discrepancy between the raw data position and the FM position: PRESS the DATA key on the MCDU. SELECT the POSITION MONITOR page. SELECT “FREEZE”. On the other MCDU: Select the GPS MONITOR page.
MONITORING THE FUEL PREDICTIONS Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
The F-PLN and FUEL PRED pages display fuel and time predictions throughout the flight. These predictions are meaningful if the lateral and vertical flight plan, and the entered winds are kept accurate enough as the flight progresses. PROCEDURE In addition to the Fuel Management procedure described in the SOPs (Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A Cruise - Flight Progress), periodically apply the following actions: KEEP ACCURATE FMS PREDICTIONS Periodically UPDATE the F-PLN elements (F-PLN waypoints, step altitudes, predicted winds). CHECK the ALTN and the MIN DEST FOB value on the FUEL PRED page The MIN DEST FOB value is computed by the FMS and equals ALTN + FINAL. At the beginning of the CRZ phase, and/or after any change of destination or alternate airport, check that the ALTN and MIN DEST FOB values are meaningful. Otherwise, update the ALTN fuel value, as appropriate. CHECK the DEST EFOB value on the F-PLN or FUEL PRED page MONITOR the EFOB at destination on the F-PLN or FUEL PRED page. If necessary, ADAPT the flight strategy. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to C →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 3/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
"DEST EFOB BELOW MIN" MESSAGE If the predicted EFOB at destination becomes less than the MIN DEST FOB value displayed on the FUEL PRED page: ‐ The destination EFOB turns to amber on the F-PLN, FUEL PRED and PERF (CLB, CRZ, DES) pages, and REPORT page. ‐ The “DEST EFOB BELOW MIN” amber message is displayed on the MCDU scratchpad, after 2 min (if the FMS is in CRZ or DES phase). Note:
If the flight crew has cleared the “DEST EFOB BELOW MIN” message, and if the predicted EFOB at destination is still less than the MIN DEST FOB value, the “DEST EFOB BELOW MIN” message will appear again at the beginning of the descent phase.
PROCEDURE If the “DEST EFOB BELOW MIN” message is triggered on the MCDU: CHECK the DEST EFOB value on the F-PLN or FUEL PRED page, CHECK the hypothesis used by the FMS to compute the fuel predictions, Check that the F-PLN elements (F-PLN waypoints, step altitudes, predicted winds) are up-to-date, to ensure that the FMS predictions are accurate. Check that the ALTN and FINAL fuel values are meaningful and correspond to the planned fuel strategy. ADAPT the flight strategy as required. MONITORING THE FUEL PREDICTIONS 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
The F-PLN and FUEL PRED pages display fuel and time predictions throughout the flight. These predictions are meaningful if the lateral and vertical flight plan, and the entered winds are kept accurate enough as the flight progresses. PROCEDURE In addition to the Fuel Management procedure described in the SOPs (Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A Cruise - Flight Progress), periodically apply the following actions: KEEP ACCURATE FMS PREDICTIONS Periodically UPDATE the F-PLN elements (F-PLN waypoints, step altitudes, predicted winds). CHECK the MIN DEST FOB value on the FUEL PRED page The MIN DEST FOB value is computed by the FMS and by default it is equals to ALTN + FINAL. ALTN, FINAL and MIN DEST FOB can be modified by the flight crew. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←C→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 4/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
At the beginning of the CRZ phase, and/or after any change of destination or alternate airport, check that the MIN DEST FOB value is meaningful. Otherwise, update the MIN DEST FOB value, as appropriate. CHECK the DEST EFOB value on the F-PLN or FUEL PRED page MONITOR the EFOB at destination on the F-PLN or FUEL PRED page. If necessary, ADAPT the flight strategy. "DEST EFOB BELOW MIN" MESSAGE If the predicted EFOB at destination becomes less than the MIN DEST FOB value displayed on the FUEL PRED page: ‐ The destination EFOB turns to amber on the F-PLN, FUEL PRED and PERF (CLB, CRZ, DES) pages, and REPORT page. ‐ The “DEST EFOB BELOW MIN” amber message is displayed on the MCDU scratchpad, after 2 min (if the FMS is in CRZ or DES phase). Note:
If the flight crew has cleared the “DEST EFOB BELOW MIN” message, and if the predicted EFOB at destination is still less than the MIN DEST FOB value, the “DEST EFOB BELOW MIN” message will appear again at the beginning of the descent phase.
PROCEDURE If the “DEST EFOB BELOW MIN” message is triggered on the MCDU: CHECK the DEST EFOB value on the F-PLN or FUEL PRED page, CHECK the hypothesis used by the FMS to compute the fuel predictions, Check that the F-PLN elements (F-PLN waypoints, step altitudes, predicted winds) are up-to-date, to ensure that the FMS predictions are accurate. Check that the MIN DEST FOB fuel value is meaningful and corresponds to the planned fuel strategy. ADAPT the flight strategy as required. ENTERING A STEP CLIMB OR A STEP DESCENT Applicable to: ALL
The crew may use the STEP ALTS page to enter up to four geographic step points or one optimal step (computed by the FMGS) at any waypoint of the cruise. PROCEDURE PRESS the F-PLN key on the MCDU. SELECT the VERT REV page at any waypoint.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← C to D →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 5/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
SELECT “STEP ALTS” prompt. The PERF PAGE displays this prompt in cruise phase. The crew may also call up the STEP ALTS page using a vertical revision at any cruise waypoint. ENTERING AN OPTIMAL STEP (ONLY STEP CLIMB) WRITE the desired step altitude into the scratchpad. ENTER it in the [1L] field The FMGS automatically computes the optimal location of the step and inserts it in the TMPY F-PLN. CHECK the FUEL and TIME SAVINGS predictions on the [ 5R ]. After insertion, the optimum step location is regularly updated, until the aircraft is within 20 nm of the step point. The ND shows symbols for the start of climb (S/C) and the top of climb (T/C). The MCDU shows the associated pseudo-waypoints. It is possible to convert an optimum step to a geographic step by overwriting the [1L] field (see geographic step).
When reaching the step climb pseudo-waypoint (S/C): REQUEST climb clearance to ATC. ADJUST the FCU altitude to the STEP ALT, and PUSH the FCU knob. Note:
The step will be deleted from the F-PLN after having sequenced the start of climb for the step.
ENTERING A GEOGRAPHIC STEP (STEP CLIMB OR STEP DESCENT) WRITE a step altitude and waypoint into the scratchpad. The format is : ‐ Altitude (or FL)/waypoint (Ex: FL 350/BERAD) ‐ Altitude (or FL)/waypoint/distance (Ex: FL 350/BERAD/-20) CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 6/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
The waypoint must be in the flight plan. ENTER it in [1L] to [4L] field. It is possible to independently modify either the location or the altitude of an existing step altitude. It is not possible to modify with a single entry both the location and the altitude : An entry “waypoint/xxx” will be taken by the system as an along track offset of xxx nautical miles. CHECK the predictions (distance, time). When reaching the step climb or descent pseudo-waypoint (S/C or S/D): REQUEST climb or descent clearance ADJUST the FCU altitude to the STEP ALT, and PUSH the FCU knob.
The DIST/TIME field may display the following messages: ‐ ABOVE MAX if the step altitude exceeds the MAX ALT. ‐ IGNORED if the step end point is less than 50 nm from the top of descent or if the step climb is located prior to the top of climb or after the top of descent. ‐ STEP AHEAD when the aircraft is within 20 nm of the step point. If the aircraft overflies the step pseudo-waypoint without commencing a climb or a descent, the system deletes the step from the vertical F-PLN automatically (a “STEP DELETED” message is displayed on the MCDU scratchpad), and recomputes the predictions. The step is not deleted if the FCU altitude is moved only partially towards the step altitude. The flight phase remains “cruise” whenever a step is initiated. Note:
For an altitude restriction defined at a waypoint less than 50 nm before the top of descent and lower than the CRZ FL, it is recommended to enter an altitude constraint rather than a step.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←D
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 7/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
IMMEDIATE CHANGE OF LEVEL IN CRUISE Applicable to: ALL
When the flight crew changes the flight level through a FCU altitude selection: ‐ If the FCU-selected altitude is above the previous CRZ FL, the CRZ FL on the PROG page changes to the new flight level. ‐ If the FCU-selected altitude is lower than the previous CRZ FL and if the distance to DEST is more than 200 nm, the CRZ FL on the PROG page changes. In that case Mach target is managed as follows: • At the start of the descent, the Mach target is the managed Mach number at the initial cruise flight level. • When the aircraft reaches the new flight level, the Mach target switches either to the Mach number for the lower CRZ FL, or to the speed for the lower CRZ FL if the aircraft reaches the crossover altitude. This logic prevents the aircraft from exceeding VMO during descent. ‐ If the FCU-selected altitude is lower than the previous CRZ FL and the aircraft is within 200 nm of its destination, the system activates the descent phase. The pilot may reactivate the cruise phase by entering a new cruise flight level in the PROG page. CAUTION
If the pilot modifies the CRZ FL on the PROG page without setting the FCU altitude, the FMS may target a Speed/Mach above VMO/MMO. Changing the FCU altitude makes the FMS behavior become correct again.
PREPARATION FOR DESCENT AND APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL The preparation for descent and approach consists of : ‐ Entering PERF and WIND data ‐ Defining the lateral and vertical F-PLN ‐ Checking the tuning (auto or manual) of the appropriate navaids After receiving the arrival information, the flight crew should use the following procedure.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
E to F →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 8/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: ALL
REVISION OF LATERAL F-PLN
PERFORM a lateral revision at destination SELECT an ARRIVAL prompt. SELECT an APPROACH. SELECT A STAR. If a desired, call up VIA subpage by pressing [2L] prompt on STAR page and SELECT a VIA. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 9/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
When the pilot selects successive items, the page are automatically sequenced. But pressing "→" key brings up the APPR and STAR page successively.
CHECK and INSERT the TMPY F-PLN or continue with next revision. Applicable to: ALL
REVISION OF VERTICAL FLIGHT PLAN CHECK that the speed and altitude constraints as displayed on the ND. (Use the CSTR pusbutton). ENTER any additional speed or altitude constraints using the vertical revision page. In order not to be too fast when commencing the approach, you may insert a speed constraint at the FAF (Final Approach Fix). When all computations are completed. REVIEW the flight plan, using the approach chart. Note:
: When the crew changes the approach or the destination runway, and if the previously selected approach procedure is compatible with the new one, the system automatically inserts it in the temporary F-PLN. For further details, Refer to DSC-22_20-30-10-18 Changing the Departure/Arrival.
Applicable to: ALL
ENTERING THE WINDS FOR DESCENT Refer to DSC-22_20-30-20-28-B Wind - Temperature - QNH - General. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
PRESELECTING A MANAGED SPEED/MACH As long as the descent phase is not active, the PERF DES page may either be used to select a speed, or a Mach number, or both, to replace the optimum descent speed.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 10/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
The Flight Guidance Computer then uses the entered speed, instead of the optimum speed for computing the descent profile. When the system switches to the descent phase, it sets the MANAGED target speed to the entered speed. From there, the speed may only be modified by using the FCU selector knob. Once in descent phase, the pilot cannot modify the MANAGED speed again.
PROCEDURE PRESS the PERF key on MCDU. SELECT the “NEXT PHASE” prompt. WRITE the descent speed into the scratchpad and ENTER it. The 3L field displays the imposed managed speed value. 2 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
PRESELECTING A MANAGED SPEED/MACH The PERF DES page may either be used to select a speed, or a Mach number, or both, to replace the optimum descent speed. The Flight Guidance Computer then uses the entered speed, instead of the optimum speed for computing the descent profile. When the system switches to the descent phase, it sets the MANAGED target speed to the entered speed. From there, the speed may only be modified by using the FCU selector knob. Once in descent phase, the pilot cannot modify the MANAGED speed again.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 11/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
PROCEDURE PRESS the PERF key on MCDU. SELECT the “NEXT PHASE” prompt. WRITE the descent speed into the scratchpad and ENTER it. The 3L field displays the imposed managed speed value. Applicable to: ALL
MODIFICATION OF THE CABIN RATE
PROCEDURE PRESS the MCDU's PERF key. WRITE the new cabin rate in the scratchpad. ENTER it in the [5R] field.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 12/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
ENTERING THE APPROACH DATA From PERF DES page, SELECT “NEXT PHASE” [ 6R ] key to display the APPR page. ENTER QNH, TEMP, WIND at destination (magnetic north reference), DH or MDA (MDH depending on the OPC option). (The PFD displays the MDA/MDH or DH value, only when the distance to destination is less than 250 nm). CHECK and, if necessary, MODIFY the LDG CONF (landing configuration) CHECK, and if necessary MODIFY the VAPP The FMS-computed value may be modified CHECK the TRANS FL value (see note 1 below)
Note:
1. The default TRANS FL value is computed by the FMS based on: ‐ The Transition Altitude of the destination airport (extracted from the NAV Database) ‐ The QNH value entered on PERF APPR page. Due to the internal FMS computation of altitude constraints, it is rounded to the upper multiple of 5. The crew should not modify this default TRANS FL value, if it slightly differs from the Transition Level specified on the approach chart or reported by ATC. 2. The scratchpad displays “ENTER DEST DATA” if the PERF APPR page has not been completed when the aircraft is less than 180 nm from destination.
SELECT “NEXT PHASE” in order to display the GO AROUND page.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 13/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
CHECK and, if necessary, MODIFY the THR RED ALT and the ACC ALT.
3 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
ENTERING THE APPROACH DATA From PERF DES page, SELECT “NEXT PHASE” [ 6R ] key to display the APPR page. ENTER QNH, TEMP, WIND at destination (magnetic north reference), minimum in the RADIO or BARO fields. (The PFD displays the entered BARO or RADIO minimum value, only when the distance to destination is less than 250 nm). CHECK and, if necessary, MODIFY the LDG CONF (landing configuration) CHECK, and if necessary MODIFY the VAPP The FMS-computed value may be modified CHECK the TRANS FL value (see note 1 below)
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 14/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note:
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
1. The default TRANS FL value is computed by the FMS based on: ‐ The Transition Altitude of the destination airport (extracted from the NAV Database) ‐ The QNH value entered on PERF APPR page. Due to the internal FMS computation of altitude constraints, it is rounded to the upper multiple of 5. The crew should not modify this default TRANS FL value, if it slightly differs from the Transition Level specified on the approach chart or reported by ATC. 2. The scratchpad displays “ENTER DEST DATA” if the PERF APPR page has not been completed when the aircraft is less than 180 nm from destination.
SELECT “NEXT PHASE” in order to display the GO AROUND page. CHECK and, if necessary, MODIFY the THR RED ALT and the ACC ALT.
Applicable to: ALL
SELECTING THE RADIO NAVAIDS CHECK or SELECT the NAVAIDS appropriate for the approach. For an ILS procedure, the ILS will be autotuned. NDBs must be manually entered. Note:
When the destination has a VOR/DME, ENTER it manually in the VOR field. ENTER its identifier in the BRG/DIST field of the PROG page. This allows you to perform a permanent NAV accuracy check.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 15/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
4 Applicable to: ALL
COST INDEX FOR LONG-RANGE CRUISE The flight crew can use the table below to find an approximate Cost Index value that is calculated for cruise at long-range cruise speed. This value is valid for CRZ FL = OPT ALT ± 10 000 ft. AIRCRAFT
ENGINE
A318/A319/A320/A321
CFM 56-5-A1/A3 CFM 56-5-A4/A5 CFM 56-5-B1/B2/B3 CFM 56-5-B4 (A321) CFM 56-5-B4 (A320) CFM 56-5-B4/P CFM 56-5-B5/B6/B7 CFM 56-5-B5/2P CFM 56-5-B6/2P CFM 56-5-B7/2P CFM 56-5-B8/B9 PW6122/PW6124 V2500-A1 V2522-A5/V2524-A5/ V2527M-A5 V2530-A5/V2533-A5 V2527-A5/V2527E-A5
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←F
kg/min 45 40 65 65 55 25 25
CILRC
100 lb/h 60 55 85 85 75 35 35
30
40
15 20 45 50 50 40
20 30 60 70 70 55
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 P 16/16 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Descent DESCENT INITIATION Applicable to: ALL
The top of descent, displayed on the F-PLN page (T/D) and on the ND ( ), is a position that the system calculates, assuming that the aircraft will begin its descent in DES mode with managed speed, and that the system will guide the aircraft along the descent profile computed with all the vertical F-PLN data (ALT CSTR, ECON or AUTO MACH/SPD, SPD CSTR, SPD LIMIT) to reach VAPP at 1 000 ft AGL. Note:
The ND does not display the top of descent
when HDG (or TRACK) mode is engaged.
PROCEDURES When the aircraft reaches the top of descent (F/D) : SELECT the altitude target. PUSH the ALT selector knob. DES mode engages. CHECK the FMA annunciators.
DESCENT MONITORING Applicable to: ALL
DES MODE ENGAGED When DES mode is engaged, NAV mode is engaged, and the system takes into account all altitude and speed constraints. The key parameter for monitoring the descent is the vertical deviation (VDEV) displayed on the PFD and on the PROG page, which indicates whether the aircraft is on, above, or below the descent profile. PROCEDURE SET the ATC-cleared altitude on the FCU (considering also what is the safe altitude). If the lowest safe altitude is higher than the ATC-cleared altitude, check with ATC that this constraint applies. If it is confirmed, SET the FCU altitude to the safe altitude until it is safe to go to the ATC-cleared altitude. MONITOR vertical deviation (VDEV) on the PFD and the PROG page. MONITOR the speed change that occurs, when the aircraft reaches a speed change symbol (magenta ball) under managed speed. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A to B →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 1/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
MONITOR the FMA (ALT*, ALT CST*, ALT, ALT CST), when the aircraft reaches level symbols. If the aircraft is on the descent profile: The aircraft is considered to be on the vertical profile, when it is within 50 ft of it. VDEV is close to zero, and the system predicts that it will match constraints until the aircraft levels off at the next FCU altitude. MONITOR the predicted descent point after the next level-off. A/THR adjusts thrust for the particular segment. The first FMA column may display “THR IDLE” or “SPEED”.
If the aircraft is above the descent profile: VDEV is down on the PFD and positive on the PROG page. A/THR sets IDLE thrust and the AP increases speed by calling for down elevator. If the aircraft reaches the upper limit of the managed speed range, the aircraft diverges and maintains the upper limit speed.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 2/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Procedure SELECT a descent speed higher than the upper limit when possible. MONITOR the intercept symbol . When this symbol reaches the next ALT CSTR waypoint, “MORE DRAG” appears on the PFD, indicating that speedbrakes must be extended in order to match the next altitude constraint. This is an advisory message. Note:
When DES mode is engaged, speed brake extension will not necessarily increase the descent rate. It does so, if the aircraft is above the profile. If the aircraft is on or below the profile: The system will add thrust to keep the aircraft on profile and within the speed target range.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 3/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If an altitude constraint is predicted to be missed by more than 250 ft the vertical revision page shows ALT ERROR at the waypoint.
If a speed constraint is predicted to be missed by more than 10 kt: SELECT an appropriate speed. RESUME managed speed when the aircraft is back on the descent profile. If the aircraft is below the descent profile VDEV is up on the PFD and negative on the PROG page. The system maintains the target speed (managed or selected speed). CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 4/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
MONITOR the intercept symbol ([ ]) on the ND and any leveling off at the next ALT CSTR. If the aircraft is flying at an altitude that is higher than both the descent speed limit altitude and the destination elevation +5 000 ft: The FMGS maintains the V/S at -1 000 ft/min and the target speed, until the aircraft reaches the altitude constraint or intercepts the descent profile. If the aircraft is flying at an altitude that is lower than either the descent speed limit altitude, or the destination elevation +5 000 ft: The FMGS maintains the V/S at - 500 ft/min and the target speed, until the aircraft intercepts either the altitude constraint or the descent profile.
If the rate of descent has to be increased (ATC requirement): SELECT OP DES mode Increase the target speed or extend the speedbrakes.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 5/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
OP DES, V/S OR FPA MODE ENGAGED ‐ In either case, the aircraft is no longer guided on the descent profile and altitude constraints are disregarded. If NAV mode is engaged the ND displays a white circle on waypoint with an altitude constraint. If NAV mode is disengaged, the circle is removed. ‐ The PFD still shows VDEV for reference purposes. ‐ The target altitude is always the FCU selected altitude (shown in blue). On the ND, level-off symbol is blue (no constraint). If NAV mode is engaged and the speed target managed, speed constraints are considered.
When HDG or TRK mode is engaged, vertical position may also be assessed on the ND using the energy circle. It is displayed as a green arc oriented on the current track and centered on the aircraft current position. Note:
Altitude and speed predictions displayed on the F-PLN page assume an immediate return to DES mode.
PROCEDURE SET the FCU altitude as cleared by ATC, while considering the applicable safe altitude. If the next safe altitude is higher than the ATC-cleared altitude, check with the ATC to verify that this constraint applies. If confirmed, set the FCU altitude to the safe altitude, until it is safe to fly at the cleared altitude. MONITOR the speed target, when the aircraft reaches the speed change symbol. MONITOR the FMA ALT*, ALT, upon reaching the level symbol. When in HDG/TRK mode, MONITOR the energy circle on the ND. The MCDU F-PLN page presents SPD/ALT constraint-matching predictions, which assume that DES mode is immediately re-engaged.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 6/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CHECK the predictions before re-engaging DES mode (in order to resume the descent profile). Note:
VDEV is available on the PFD even in HDG mode; it is a valuable tool for monitoring the descent, as long as crosstrack error (XTK) is less than 5 nm. The aircraft automatically decelerates for approach, only if it flies over the DECEL pseudo waypoint with NAV mode engaged (or LOC*, LOC). EXPEDITE DESCENT (IF INSTALLED)
Applicable to: ALL
When ATC requires a rapid descent : DEPRESS THE EXPED pushbutton Flight guidance (FG) pitches the aircraft to acquire and maintain 0.80/340. FG orders a pitch rate that produces no more than 0.15 g. The pilot can use this mode to initiate an emergency descent. To resume normal descent, PUSH the ALT selection knob or engage any other vertical mode.
MONITORING THE NAVIGATION IN THE TERMINAL CONTROL AREA Applicable to: ALL
If the MCDU “AREA RNP IS XX.X” message or “PROCEDURE RNP IS XX.X” message is displayed, the pilot will manually-entered RNP value in the REQUIRED field of the PROG page and clear or modify it, if it is not in accordance with the RNP value specified in the area (NAV or approach chart). TOO STEEP PATH Applicable to: ALL
“TOO STEEP PATH AHEAD” appears on the MCDU scratchpad, when the system predicts this situation, and TOO STEEP PATH is displayed on the F-PLN page. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← B to E →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 7/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
When the aircraft is crossing the first waypoint of a TOO STEEP PATH, the system computes a flyable descent profile (with an idle segment). The VDEV makes a jump because it is related to a new profile.
PROCEDURE When passing the first waypoint of the TOO STEEP PATH: MONITOR VDEV and predictions at the next CSTR waypoint. If required, EXTEND the speedbrakes before seeing the “MORE DRAG” message. CONSIDER using a holding pattern, if necessary. HOLDING PATTERN Applicable to: ALL
A hold may be required during the descent, and may be manually inserted. PROCEDURE PRESS the F-PLN key. SELECT the lateral revision page. SELECT the HOLD prompt. CHECK the HOLDING data, and MODIFY it if necessary.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← E to F →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 8/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
CHECK the temporary flight plan and INSERT the holding pattern in it. Note:
If the holding fix is close to the DECEL pseudo waypoint and the speed is managed, manually activate the approach phase to change the managed target speed to approach speed (VAPP). This will avoid having an increase of speed not appropriate.
MANUAL TERMINATION Applicable to: ALL
You should not use DES mode when entering a leg with manual termination. Manual termination, which is defined as a track or a heading with no termination, is always part of a database procedure. The computed descent flight profile may not be adequate when flying this type of leg.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← F to G
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 9/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Intentionally left blank
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 P 10/10 07 APR 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Approach INITIAL APPROACH Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
UPON REACHING THE INITIAL APPROACH AREA ‐ Approach phase will activate automatically when flying over the DECEL pseudo waypoint with NAV, APPR NAV or LOC* or LOC mode engaged. ‐ You will activate manually the approach phase on the PERF page if: • HDG or TRK mode is engaged, or • You are flying a go around, or • An early deceleration is required
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 1/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
MANAGED SPEED CHECK that managed speed is active: MONITOR the target speed. During the approach, the autothrust limits the speed of the current configuration. (GD, S, F, VAPP).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 2/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If ATC requires a specific speed: SWITCH to selected speed (turn and pull the speed selector knob on the FCU). ADJUST the aircraft configuration accordingly. If ATC orders successive step descents down to the final approach flight path: Use the V/S or FPA mode. MONITOR VDEV. NAV ACCURACY As required by the SOP. Without installed GPS and when no DME is available for the accuracy check, use HIGH/LOW on the PROG page. In this case, consider a “HIGH” to be equivalent to a positive crosscheck. ATC CLEARANCE MODIFY the F-PLN, RAD NAV, and PERF APPR data to agree with the latest clearance and landing information.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 3/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
INITIAL APPROACH 1 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
UPON REACHING THE INITIAL APPROACH AREA ‐ Approach phase will activate automatically when flying over the DECEL pseudo waypoint with NAV, LOC*, LOC, F-LOC* or F-LOC mode engaged. ‐ You will activate manually the approach phase on the PERF page if: • HDG or TRK mode is engaged, or • You are flying a go around, or • An early deceleration is required
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 4/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
MANAGED SPEED CHECK that managed speed is active: MONITOR the target speed. During the approach, the autothrust limits the speed of the current configuration. (GD, S, F, VAPP).
If ATC requires a specific speed: SWITCH to selected speed (turn and pull the speed selector knob on the FCU). ADJUST the aircraft configuration accordingly. If ATC orders successive step descents down to the final approach flight path: Use the V/S or FPA mode. MONITOR VDEV. NAV ACCURACY As required by the SOP. For Non Precision Approaches flown with the FLS function, the flight crew must check the FLS capability. Without installed GPS and when no DME is available for the accuracy check, use HIGH/LOW on the PROG page. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←A→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 5/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
In this case, consider a "HIGH" to be equivalent to a positive crosscheck. ATC CLEARANCE MODIFY the F-PLN, RAD NAV, and PERF APPR data to agree with the latest clearance and landing information.
ILS/MLS/GLS/FLS APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
INTERMEDIATE/FINAL APPROACH (ILS APPROACH ENTERED IN THE F-PLN) The preferred technique for flying an ILS approach is to fly a decelerated approach using the AP/FDs, the LOC and G/S modes, A/THR in the SPEED mode, managed speed target is recommended. DECELERATED APPROACH The decelerated approach technique brings the aircraft down to 1 000 ft, at VAPP. In most cases, the interception of the final descent path is achieved with CONF 1 at S speed.
(*)
The approach must be stabilized at approach speed (minimum ground speed) in the landing configuration before reaching 1 000 ft AGL.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← A to B →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 6/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: ALL
APPROACH MODE ACTIVATION (LOC-G/S) When cleared by ATC and when appropriate: DEPRESS the APPR pushbutton to arm the APPR mode for the approach entered in the flight plan. Note:
If a NON PRECISION approach is selected in the active flight plan and if the flight crew manually tunes an ILS on the RAD NAV page, the MCDU and the PFD display "CHECK APPR SELECTION". This message is a reminder to the flight crew that, although an ILS is tuned on RAD NAV page, the available approach guidance modes are APP NAV-FINAL when the APPR pushbutton is pressed in on the FCU.
The FCU APPR pushbutton arms or engages LOC and G/S modes, if: ‐ An ILS approach is entered in the flight plan, or ‐ No approach, or only a runway, is entered in the flight plan, and an ILS is manually-tuned on the RAD NAV page, or ‐ Both RMPs are set to NAV, and an ILS is selected. 2 Applicable to: B-6709, B-6710, B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790,
B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, MSN 5006
AUTOLAND CHECK that the FMA displays the aircraft capability (CAT 2 or CAT 3) for the intended ILS approach. MONITOR the radio automatic callout. At 350 ft RA: CHECK that “LAND” is displayed on the FMA. CHECK ILS course. If LAND is not displayed or if the ILS course is not correct, do not perform an autoland. The flight crew should perform a go-around, if visual references are not sufficient. Between 50 and 40 ft RA: CHECK that “FLARE” is displayed on the FMA. At approximately 30 ft RA: CHECK that “IDLE” is displayed on the FMA, and that autothrust starts to reduce thrust toward IDLE. At 10 ft, “RETARD” callout comes up: MOVE the thrust levers to IDLE. Autothrust disconnects. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 7/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
At touchdown: CHECK that “ROLL OUT” appears on the FMA. Note:
In the case of tailwind during an automatic rollout, it is recommended to use manual braking without delay or automatic braking for an optimised runway centerline tracking.
At the end of the Rollout: Disconnect the autopilot. If the flight crew does not disconnect the AP at the end of the rollout, and uses the nosewheel steering handwheel to taxi the aircraft off the runway, the following will occur: ‐ The AP will try to steer the aircraft back to the runway centerline, if the nosewheel steering handwheel is released and the aircraft heading is less than 20 ° off the runway centerline. ‐ The AP will automatically disconnect, if the aircraft heading is 20 ° or more off the runway centerline. 3 Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6181, B-6182, B-6192, B-6193, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210,
B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6245, B-6400, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6405, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, D-AVYF
AUTOLAND CHECK that the FMA displays the aircraft capability (CAT 2 or CAT 3) for the intended ILS approach. MONITOR the radio automatic callout. At 350 ft RA: CHECK that “LAND” is displayed on the FMA. CHECK ILS course. If LAND is not displayed or if the ILS course is not correct, do not perform an autoland. The flight crew should perform a go-around, if visual references are not sufficient. Between 50 and 40 ft RA: CHECK that “FLARE” is displayed on the FMA. At approximately 30 ft RA: CHECK that “IDLE” is displayed on the FMA, and that autothrust starts to reduce thrust toward IDLE. At 10 ft, “RETARD” callout comes up: MOVE the thrust levers to IDLE. Autothrust disconnects.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 8/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
At touchdown: CHECK that “ROLL OUT” appears on the FMA. At the end of the Rollout: Disconnect the autopilot. If the flight crew does not disconnect the AP at the end of the rollout, and uses the nosewheel steering handwheel to taxi the aircraft off the runway, the following will occur: ‐ The AP will try to steer the aircraft back to the runway centerline, if the nosewheel steering handwheel is released and the aircraft heading is less than 20 ° off the runway centerline. ‐ The AP will automatically disconnect, if the aircraft heading is 20 ° or more off the runway centerline. Applicable to: ALL
MANUAL LANDING At DH: DISCONNECT the APs. SPEED mode remains engaged. At 20 ft “RETARD” automatic call out comes up: MOVE the thrust levers to IDLE if they are not there already. (The A/THR disconnects). At touch down: “ROLL OUT” appears on the FMA and the yaw bar comes up on the PFD. Note:
The retard call out is only a reminder when a manual landing is performed.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 9/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
STANDARD ILS AUTOMATIC APPROACH
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 10/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
4 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
STANDARD ILS AUTOMATIC APPROACH
Applicable to: ALL
EARLY SELECTION OF APPROACH MODE LOC-G/S Pressing the APPR pushbutton arms LOC and G/S. The RA signal is not valid above 8 200 ft AGL (TRT), or 5 000 ft AGL (Collins) or 7 900 ft AGL (Honeywell).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 11/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If the aircraft is cleared for an ILS approach, when it is higher than 8 200 ft AGL (TRT), or 5 000 ft AGL (Collins), or 7 900 ft AGL (Honeywell), proceed as follows: PRESS the APPR pushbutton on the FCU. When aligned on the localizer, check LOC and G/S engagement: CAT 1 is displayed on the FMA. (Radio altimeters not yet valid). Check that the FMA displays the correct capability for the intended approach, when the aircraft is below 5 000 ft AGL. Applicable to: ALL
GLIDESLOPE INTERCEPTION FROM ABOVE If the aircraft is above the glideslope, the system will not capture the G/S automatically. The pilot must bring the aircraft onto the glideslope beam, and select an appropriate V/S to intercept it. Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A Initial Approach - General. Applicable to: ALL
DATA LOCK When the aircraft reaches 700 ft RA with APPR mode (LOC and G/S) armed or engaged, the ILS FREQ and course are frozen in the receiver. This function (ILS tune inhibit) is available, when at least one AP/FD is engaged. Any attempt to change the ILS frequency or CRS, via the MCDU or RMP, does not affect the receiver. If the speed is managed, the system does not accept any modifications the pilot may enter on the PERF APPR page (surface wind, selected landing configuration, or VAPP) for speed guidance purposes below this altitude. When the aircraft reaches 400 ft RA, LAND mode engages. The flight crew can only disengage this mode by engaging the GO AROUND mode. Applicable to: ALL
USE OF RMPS FOR ILS/DME If both FMGCs fail, the flight crew can use the RMPs (Radio Management Panels 1 and 2) for back up tuning. Either RMP controls ILS. Prior to select an ILS frequency on one of the RMPs, the flight crew has to select “NAV” button from RMP 1 and RMP 2. If the ILS has a DME, the PFD will not display the DME distance. In this situation, the flight crew will fly without DME information. If necessary, increase the Decision height (DH) accordingly.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 12/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: ALL
LOCALIZER (LOC) BEAM CAPTURE The flight crew must always monitor the capture of a LOC beam. During this evolution, the PFD and ND must indicate that associated deviation indications move toward the centre of the scale. To avoid performing a false capture, the flight crew must be careful not to arm the LOC to early. The following graph shows the angle of interception versus distance to the runway threshold that ensures that the aircraft will not overshoot the axis by more than one and a half dot.
The capture begins when the deviation is two dots or less. It is programmed to line the aircraft up on the beam with a single overshoot, even if the intercept angle is large. Note:
ICAO requires LOC beam to ensure a normal capture within 10 nm and plus or minus 35 ° from the course centerline. Some ILS systems just meet the requirement and are subject to false capture outside these limits.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←B
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 13/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
SWITCHING FROM NON ILS TO ILS APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
If an ILS approach is possible when a non ILS was previously scheduled, use one of the following procedures: USE OF SECOND FLIGHT PLAN Use a secondary flight plan to prepare the alternate ILS approach, time permitting. COPY the ACTIVE flight plan. REVISE the ARRIVAL: insert the ILS approach and the applicable STAR/VIA. On the RAD NAV page, TUNE in the ILS manually. REVISE the PERF APPR page. CHANGE OF THE CLEARANCE ATC changes the clearance from the non-ILS to the ILS approach. If a secondary flight plan has been prepared: ACTIVATE the SEC F-PLN and adjust. Follow subsequent standard procedures. If a secondary flight plan has not been prepared: REVISE the ARRIVAL on the primary F-PLN, inserting the ILS approach. REVISE the PERF APPR page. Follow subsequent standard procedures. CAUTION
If the pilot decides to fly the ILS approach without revising the arrival of the primary flight plan (a non ILS approach is in the F-PLN), LOC and G/S modes will not be available when he presses the APPR pushbutton. Consequently, he should: • Manually TUNE in the ILS on the RAD NAV page: CHECK that the "CHECK APPR SELECTION" message comes up. • Press the ILS pushbutton and select ROSE ILS on the EIS CONTROL panel. • Use HDG, V/S or TRK, FPA modes to fly the ILS.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
C
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 14/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
TASK SHARING DURING CAT I, CAT II AND CAT III APPROACH AND LANDING Applicable to: ALL
LIM-22-20 section of this FCOM provides all limitations regarding CAT I, CAT II, and CAT III approaches and landings. This includes precautions to be taken when performing autoland on CAT I ILS beam with good visibility. Anytime a precision approach is performed the PNF must announce that a flight parameter is being exceeded, if: ‐ During glide beam capture: • Pitch attitude becomes less than -2.5 ° or greater than +10 ° (nose up). • Vertical speed exceeds + 500 ft/min or -1 250 ft/min. ‐ During final approach: • Speed goes below speed target - 5 kt or above speed target + 10 kt ( “SPEED”) • Pitch attitude goes below -2.5 ° or above 10 ° (“PITCH”) • Bank angle becomes greater than 7 ° (“BANK”) • Descent rate becomes greater than 1 000 ft/min (“SINK RATE”) • There is too much LOC or GLIDE deviation (“LOCALIZER” or “GLIDE”). If the flight crew suspects that autopilot guidance is not effective, they should: ‐ Use the instinctive disconnect pushbutton to disconnect the autopilot, or ‐ Perform an automatic go-around. The flight crew may perform a CAT II/CAT III approach, if: ‐ The FMA displays the corresponding category ‐ The required systems and functions are operative ‐ The airport is approved for the intended operations ‐ They are qualified to perform the specific approach. CAT III APPROACH AUTO CALL OUT RA is mandatory. A/THR in SPEED MODE is mandatory. Note:
AUTO CALL OUT is not mandatory for CAT 2 approach: The PNF may perform this function.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
D
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 15/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
TASK SHARING FOR CAT I APPROACH (OR BETTER) Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
PF
PNF
•At 350 ft AGL (or RA) Check ILS course on PFD ″LAND″ when displayed on FMA •At Decision Altitude (or Decision height, if QFE is used) + 100 ft Monitor or announce ″HUNDRED ABOVE" (1) •At Decision Altitude (or Decision Height, if QFE is used) Monitor or announce ″MINIMUM″ (1) •If external visual references are sufficient ″CONTINUE″ •If automatic landing not performed Disconnect the APs and perform the landing Monitor CALL OUT or announce as appropriate: 300 ft 200 ft 100 ft 50 ft 30 ft 20 ft 10 ft At ″RETARD″ annunciation, retard thrust levers to IDLE if not yet performed •If automatic landing performed Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 Task Sharing for CAT III Approach/Landing without DH : From 40 ft RA to Touchdown •If external visual references are not sufficient ″GO AROUND, FLAPS″ and execute (1)
‐ CAT I minimum (DH or DA) is always BARO-referenced and should be entered in the MDA/MDH field of the PERF APPR page. ‐ Pin programming enables operators to select the required callouts.
TASK SHARING FOR CAT I APPROACH (OR BETTER) 5 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
PF
PNF
•At 350 ft AGL (or RA) Check ILS course on PFD ″LAND″ when displayed on FMA
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
Continued on the following page
E→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 16/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Continued from the previous page
PF
PNF
•At Decision Altitude (or Decision height, if QFE is used) + 100 ft Monitor or ″HUNDRED ABOVE" (1) •At Decision Altitude (or Decision Height, if QFE is used) Monitor or ″MINIMUM″ (1) •If external visual references are sufficient ″CONTINUE″ •If automatic landing not performed Disconnect the APs and perform the landing Monitor CALL OUT or announce as appropriate: 300 ft 200 ft 100 ft 50 ft 30 ft 20 ft 10 ft At ″RETARD″ annunciation, retard thrust levers to IDLE if not yet performed •If automatic landing performed Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 Task Sharing for CAT III Approach/Landing without DH : From 40 ft RA to Touchdown •If external visual references are not sufficient ″GO AROUND, FLAPS″ and execute (1)
‐ CAT I minimum (DH or DA) is always BARO-referenced and must be entered in the BARO field of the PERF APPR page. ‐ Pin programming enables operators to select the required callouts.
TASK SHARING FOR CAT II APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
PF
•At 350 ft RA Check ILS course on PFD Commence outside scanning ″LAND″ when displayed on FMA •At Decision Height + 100 ft •At Decision Height •If external visual references are sufficient ″CONTINUE″
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PNF
Monitor auto callout ″HUNDRED ABOVE″ Monitor auto callout ″MINIMUM″. Continued on the following page
← E to F →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 17/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS Continued from the previous page
PF
•If Automatic landing not performed Disconnect the AP's and perform the landing
PNF
Monitor auto callouts or announce as appropriate: 200 ft 100 ft 50 ft 30 ft 20 ft
At ″RETARD″ annunciation, retard thrust levers to IDLE 10 ft ″RETARD″ auto callout (1) if not yet performed •If Automatic landing is performed Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 Task Sharing for CAT III Approach/Landing without DH : From 40 ft RA to Touchdown
•If external visual references are not sufficient ″GO-AROUND, FLAPS″ and execute (1) “RETARD” auto callout comes up at 10 ft if LAND mode is engaged with one or two APs engaged. Otherwise it is announced at 20 ft.
TASK SHARING FOR CAT III APPROACH WITH DH Applicable to: ALL
PF
•At 350 ft RA Check ILS course on PFD Commence outside scanning ″LAND″ when displayed on FMA •At Decision Height + 100 ft •At Decision Height •If external visual references are sufficient ″CONTINUE″ •At 40 ft RA •At 30 ft RA Monitor thrust reduction and flare by flight instruments •At 10 ft RA Auto callout ″RETARD″ RETARD both thrust levers to IDLE Monitor lateral guidance by external reference •At TOUCH DOWN
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
PNF
Monitor auto callout ″HUNDRED ABOVE″ Monitor auto callout ″MINIMUM″.
Check FLARE on FMA and announce Monitor auto callouts Monitor engines parameters Check ROLL OUT on FMA and announce Continued on the following page
← F to G →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 18/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Continued from the previous page
PF
PNF
Select and control reverse thrust Disengage the APs at the end of the Roll out (when leaving the runway at the latest) •If external visual references are not sufficient ″GO-AROUND, FLAPS″ and execute
Check reverse green and announce Announce 70 kt
TASK SHARING FOR CAT III APPROACH/LANDING WITHOUT DH Applicable to: ALL
PF
PNF
•At 350 ft RA Check ILS course on PFD ″LAND″ when displayed on FMA •At 100 ft RA If no failure is detected, ″CONTINUE″ •At 40 ft RA
Monitor auto callout (1)
•At 30 ft RA Monitor thrust reduction and flare by flight instruments •At 10 ft RA AUTO CALL OUT ″RETARD″ RETARD both thrust levers to IDLE Monitor lateral guidance by external reference •At TOUCH DOWN Select and control reverse thrust
Check FLARE on FMA and announce Monitor auto callout (1) Monitor engines parameters CHECK ROLL OUT on FMA and announce Check reverse green and announce Announce 70 kt
Disengage the APs at the end of the Roll out (when leaving the runway at the latest) (1) In case of CAT III without DH, the pilot should enter “NO” in the DH field of the MCDU to avoid false “HUNDRED ABOVE” or “MINIMUM” auto callouts which would not be applicable.
LANDING CATEGORIES Applicable to: ALL
Each FMGC computes its own landing category : CAT1, CAT2, CAT3 single, and CAT3 dual and displays the corresponding landing category on the FMAs. Each category depends upon the availability of aircraft systems and functions. When the landing category downgrades, a triple clic aural warning is activated.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← G to I →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 19/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
FAIL-OPERATIONAL AUTOMATIC LANDING SYSTEM An automatic landing system is fail-operational if, in the event of a failure below alert height, the remaining part of the automatic system allows the aircraft to complete the approach, flare, and landing. A CAT 3 DUAL system is a fail-operational automatic landing system. Note:
In the event of a failure, the automatic landing system operates as a fail-passive system.
FAIL-PASSIVE AUTOMATIC LANDING SYSTEM An automatic landing system is fail-passive if, in the event of a failure, there is no significant out-of-trim condition or deviation of flight path or attitude, but the landing is not completed automatically. A CAT3 single system is a fail-passive automatic landing system. Note:
With a fail-passive automatic landing system the pilot assumes control of the aircraft after a failure.
Below 100 ft (radio altimeter), the FMGS freezes the landing capability until LAND mode is disengaged or both APs are off. Therefore a failure occurring below 100 ft does not change the category of the system. ALERT HEIGHT The alert height is the height above touch down, above which a CAT3 autoland would be discontinued and a missed approach executed, if a failure occurred in either the airplane systems or the relevant ground equipments. Below the alert height, if such a failure occurs, the flare, touchdown and roll out may be accomplished using the remaining automatic system. WARNINGS FOR ILS APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
AUTOLAND WARNING With “LAND” or “FLARE” green on the FMA and at least one AP engaged, the AUTOLAND red light appears on the glareshield when the aircraft is below 200 ft RA and one of the following events occurs: ‐ The autopilots are lost, or ‐ The aircraft gets too far off the beam (LOC or G/S flash on PFD), or ‐ Loss of LOC signal above 15 ft, or loss of glide signal above 100 ft (transmitter or receivers). ‐ The difference between both radio altimeter indications is greater than 15 ft. When the Autoland light comes on, Autoland must be discontinued (Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 FAILURES AND ASSOCIATED ACTIONS BELOW 1000 FT DURING A CAT II APPROACH, CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← I to J →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 20/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 FAILURES AND ASSOCIATED ACTIONS BELOW 1000 FT CAT III WITH DH, Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 Failures and Associated Actions Below 1 000 ft for CAT III without DH). WARNING OF EXCESSIVE BEAM DEVIATION This warning is a flashing of the LOC and G/S scales on the PFD and ND ROSE ILS. It occurs whenever: ‐ G/S deviation is greater than 1 dot (above 100 ft RA). ‐ LOC deviation is greater than 1/4 dot (above 15 ft RA). WARNING ASSOCIATED WITH ILS "LANDING CAPABILITY" Any downgrading in the aircraft’s capability for automatic approach and landing sounds a triple-click aural warning. FAILURE OF BOTH LOCALIZER AND GLIDESLOPE RECEIVERS The PFD and ND (rose ILS mode) display red LOC and G/S flags (if the ILS pushbutton has been pressed green). LOC and G/S scales disappear from the PFD. If LOC or G/S modes are engaged and at least one AP/FD is engaged ‐ The AP disengages. ‐ The FD reverts to its HDG-V/S or TRK-FPA modes. FAILURE OF LOCALIZER OR GLIDESLOPE TRANSMITTER (WHEN CAPTURED) ‐ The corresponding index is lost. ‐ The LOC and G/S scales flash. ‐ The corresponding FD bar flashes. Above 200 ft RA, if the transmitter failure lasts less than 7 s, the FMA retains the LOC and G/S modes (or the LAND mode) and the APs are able to regain these modes. If the failure lasts longer than 7 s, the AP disengages and the FD reverts to its basic modes. Below 200 ft RA, if the transmitter failure occurs, the AUTOLAND warning appears, indicating that the crew must perform a GO AROUND (if insufficient visual references) with one or 2 APs engaged.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←J
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 21/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FAILURES AND ASSOCIATED ACTIONS ABOVE 1 000 FT FOR CAT II OR CAT III Applicable to: ALL
FAILURE (for multiple failures, the most limiting applies)
ONE ENGINE OUT LANDING CAPABILITY DECREASE LOSS OF A/THR
ACTION TO BE PERFORMED ABOVE 1 000 ft
LANDING CATEGORY
Complete ECAM procedure.
CAT III SINGLE
Try to recover
Switch AP, and try to reengage
NOSE WHEEL STEERING ANTI SKID AMBER "CHECK ATT" ON TWO PFDs AMBER "CHECK HDG" ON TWO PFDs AND TWO NDs RED "HDG" ON ONE PFD AND ONE ND RED "ATT" ON ONE PFD RED "SPD" ON ONE PFD "INVALID DATA" ON ONE PFD AND ONE ND RED "RA" ON TWO PFDs
Check with standby horizon, use switching to recover (no switching below 1 000 ft) Check with standby compass, use switching to recover (no switching below 1 000 ft) Use switching to recover (no switching below 1 000 ft) Use switching to recover (no switching below 1 000 ft) AP and FD not available
SLATS/FLAPS FAILURE (LESS THAN CONF 3)
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
K
As displayed on FMA CAT II (if A/THR not recovered) CAT III SINGLE (DH = 50 ft) Disengage AP at touch down CAT III SINGLE Disengage AP at touch down
CAT III SINGLE (if the warning disappears) CAT I (if not)
CAT III DUAL (if the diagonal line disappears) CAT I (if not) CAT I (minimum RVR as per regulation) CAT I Disengage AP at or above 500 ft
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 22/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FAILURES AND ASSOCIATED ACTIONS BELOW 1000 FT DURING A CAT II APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
L
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 23/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FAILURES AND ASSOCIATED ACTIONS BELOW 1000 FT CAT III WITH DH Applicable to: ALL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
M
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 24/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FAILURES AND ASSOCIATED ACTIONS BELOW 1 000 FT FOR CAT III WITHOUT DH Applicable to: ALL
BACK-COURSE LOCALIZER APPROACH - PROCEDURE Applicable to: ALL
The pilot must fly a back-course localizer approach with the ND in its ILS rose mode. PROCEDURE PRESS the RAD NAV key.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
N to O →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 25/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
ENTER the ILS IDENT. If the ILS is in the database, the system tunes the proper frequency and the front course. Note:
This may trigger the “RWY/ILS MISMATCH” message. Disregard it.
If the ILS is not in the database: SET the appropriate frequency and SET the FRONT CRS in the CRS field. On the EFIS control panel, SELECT the ILS ROSE mode. The display shows the correct LEFT/RIGHT information for the beam deviation. CAUTION
DO NOT select ILS via the LS pushbutton: Doing so makes the PFD show reverse deviations. DO NOT arm the LOC or APPR modes. DO NOT select the LS pushbutton on ISIS, since it displays the LOC deviations in the wrong sense.
The flight director may be used with the TRK-FPA or HDG-V/S modes.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←O
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 26/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
NON PRECISION APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
APPROACH SPEED TECHNIQUE Airbus recommends the stabilized approach procedure to perform non precision approaches. Applicable to: ALL
STABILIZED APPROACH The “stabilized approach” brings the aircraft to intercept the final descent path in the landing configuration and at VAPP. Managed speed is best for the stabilized approach and VAPP should be inserted as a speed constraint at the final approach fix.
Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
MANAGED NON PRECISION APPROACH The Non Precision Approach (NPA) can be flown in lateral and vertical managed guidance (FINAL APP), or in lateral managed guidance (NAV) associated with selected vertical guidance (FPA of V/S). Note:
For the conditions for using these AP modes, Refer to LIM-22-10 Auto Pilot Function and Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-19-A Introduction - Guidance For Non Precision Approaches, Other Than LOC And RNAV Non Precision Approaches.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 27/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
APPROACH PREPARATION SELECT the intended approach on the F-PLN page. Check the FM lateral and vertical flight path against the published approach chart, using the MCDU and the ND PLAN mode with constraints displayed. ENTER VAPP as SPD constraint at the FAF, with a vertical revision of the F-PLN page. For an approach in overlay to a conventional approach with radio NAVAID: SELECT/CHECK that the appropriate NAVAID is selected on the RAD NAV page. For RNAV or GPS approach, GPS PRIMARY must be available at the ETA at destination. For more information about this check, Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-19-A Introduction - Guidance For Non Precision Approaches, Other Than LOC And RNAV Non Precision Approaches. INTERMEDIATE APPROACH SELECT ROSE NAV or MAP mode and VOR or ADF raw data, as appropriate on the ND. For RNAV or GPS approach: CHECK that both GPS receivers are operative in NAV mode on the GPS MONITOR page. CHECK that GPS PRIMARY is available on the PROG PAGE. SELECT TRK/FPA display, when established on the final approach course. USE managed speed. KEEP A/THR active. Note:
For additional recommendations, refer to the dedicated FCOM Bulletin on the use of the FINAL APP mode.
FINAL APPROACH When cleared for approach: If managed lateral and vertical guidance is intended: SELECT APPR pushbutton on the FCU. CHECK APP NAV green and FINAL blue on the FMA. CHECK that blue descent arrow is displayed on ND at the FAF. CHECK that the F-PLN on ND and the V-DEV on PFD are correct. After sequencing the FAF: CHECK that FINAL APP green is displayed on the FMA. CHECK on the ND the TO waypoint, the F-PLN to the MAP and the missed approach procedure (blue line). SELECT the go-around altitude on the FCU. MONITOR the approach lateral and vertical flight path with the available raw data. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 28/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If managed lateral and selected vertical guidance is intended: CHECK NAV and FPA on the FMA. Upon reaching the FAF: Select a FPA to the final descent path. Anticipate the selection of the FPA to smoother the interception of the final descent path. After sequencing the FAF: CHECK, on the ND, the TO waypoint, the F-PLN to the MAP, and the missed approach procedure (blue line). SELECT the go-around altitude on the FCU. ADJUST the FPA to fly the intended vertical flight path. At MDA/MDH: If visual references are acquired and confirmed by both crewmembers: DISCONNECT the AP and FD and continue visually. If visual references are not acquired: INITIATE a go-around. 6 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
MANAGED NON PRECISION APPROACH The Non Precision Approach (NPA) can be flown in lateral and vertical managed guidance (FINAL APP), or in lateral managed guidance (NAV) associated with selected vertical guidance (FPA of V/S). Note:
For the conditions for using these AP modes, Refer to LIM-22-10 Auto Pilot Function and Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-19-A Introduction - Guidance For Non Precision Approaches, Other Than LOC And RNAV Non Precision Approaches.
APPROACH PREPARATION SELECT the intended approach on the F-PLN page. Check the FM lateral and vertical flight path against the published approach chart, using the MCDU and the ND PLAN mode with constraints displayed. ENTER VAPP as SPD constraint at the FAF, with a vertical revision of the F-PLN page. For an approach in overlay to a conventional approach with radio NAVAID: SELECT/CHECK that the appropriate NAVAID is selected on the RAD NAV page. CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 29/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
For RNAV or GPS approach, GPS PRIMARY must be available at the ETA at destination. For more information about this check, Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-19-A Introduction - Guidance For Non Precision Approaches, Other Than LOC And RNAV Non Precision Approaches. INTERMEDIATE APPROACH SELECT ROSE NAV or MAP mode and VOR or ADF raw data, as appropriate on the ND. For RNAV or GPS approach: CHECK that both GPS receivers are operative in NAV mode on the GPS MONITOR page. CHECK that GPS PRIMARY is available on the PROG PAGE. SELECT TRK/FPA display, when established on the final approach course. USE managed speed. KEEP A/THR active. Note:
For additional recommendations, refer to the dedicated FCOM Bulletin on the use of the FINAL APP mode.
FINAL APPROACH When cleared for approach: If managed lateral and vertical guidance is intended: SELECT APPR pushbutton on the FCU. CHECK APP NAV green and FINAL blue on the FMA. CHECK that blue descent arrow is displayed on ND at the FAF. CHECK that the F-PLN on ND and the V-DEV on PFD are correct. After sequencing the FAF: CHECK that FINAL APP green is displayed on the FMA. CHECK on the ND the TO waypoint, the F-PLN to the MAP and the missed approach procedure (blue line). SELECT the go-around altitude on the FCU. MONITOR the approach lateral and vertical flight path with the available raw data. If managed lateral and selected vertical guidance is intended: CHECK NAV and FPA on the FMA. Upon reaching the FAF: Select a FPA to the final descent path. Anticipate the selection of the FPA to smoother the interception of the final descent path. After sequencing the FAF: CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 30/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
CHECK, on the ND, the TO waypoint, the F-PLN to the MAP, and the missed approach procedure (blue line). SELECT the go-around altitude on the FCU. ADJUST the FPA to fly the intended vertical flight path. At minimum: If visual references are acquired and confirmed by both crewmembers: DISCONNECT the AP and FD and continue visually. If visual references are not acquired: INITIATE a go-around. FINAL APPROACH DURING APPROACH WITH RNP < 0.3 NM The procedure is more restrictive: ‐ Managed lateral and vertical guidance is mandatory ‐ LDEV and VDEV are monitored ‐ A go around is performed if GPS primary is lost or if AP disengages and cannot be reengaged during the approach, or XTE exceeds the published value for the intended procedures. Note:
LDEV and VDEV should be considered as monitoring tools and not as navigation tools.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 31/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: ALL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 32/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Applicable to: ALL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 33/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
7 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
Both LDEV and VDEV deviations are displayed on the PFD when the approach mode is operative and LEDV deviation when the Go A1round mode is operative. Each LDEV graduation indicates 0.1 nm of deviation. Each VDEV graduation indicates 100 ft of deviation. The indexes indicate the aircraft position deviation versus the computed lateral and vertical flight path. Applicable to: B-6156, B-6157, B-6169, B-6177, B-6178, B-6179, B-6180, B-6192, B-6198, B-6199, B-6210, B-6211, B-6212, B-6215, B-6221, B-6222, B-6400, B-6405
SELECTED NON PRECISION APPROACH The non precision approach is flown in selected modes (TRK-FPA or HDG-V/S) when: ‐ The approach is not stored in the database or ‐ GPS PRIMARY is lost and the NAV accuracy check is negative. INTERMEDIATE APPROACH Procedure USE TRK-FPA mode SELECT ND in the ROSE VOR mode CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 34/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
KEEP the autothrust active USE managed speed FINAL APPROACH Upon reaching the final approach fix SELECT a final approach track on the FCU SELECT an FPA (flight path angle) to the final descent path angle Anticipate the selection of FPA to smooth the interception of the final path. Note:
If the pilot is using the AP, select the final FPA approximately 0.3 nm before the final approach fix.
SELECT a go around altitude on FCU. USE raw data to monitor aircraft position and flight path. AT MDA/MDH: If visual references are acquired DISCONNECT the autopilot and continue the approach visually. If visual references are not acquired INITIATE a go around NON DIRECTIONAL BEACON (NDB) APPROACH TYPE When the flight plan calls for an NDB approach, the system automatically tunes the ADF, only when the aircraft is passing the first fix of the approach. Therefore, it is convenient to manually tune the ADF earlier (before activating the approach phase). Fly a Non Directional Beacon (NDB) approach as any non precision approach. LOC APPROACH TYPE SELECT the LOC pushbutton in intermediate approach, to arm the LOC mode. CAUTION
Do not select the APPR pushbutton.
SELECT the ND in ROSE LS mode. Upon reaching the final approach fix: MONITOR LOC engagement. SELECT the FPA to the final descent path angle. Note:
In case of a dual Radio Altimeter (RA) failure, the LOC pb can still be used to arm the LOC mode, as it does not depend on the RA signal.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 35/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
8 Applicable to: B-6181, B-6182, B-6193, B-6245, B-6401, B-6402, B-6403, B-6412, B-6413, B-6415, B-6416, B-6417, B-6709, B-6710,
B-6723, B-6725, B-6726, B-6727, B-6743, B-6746, B-6747, B-6748, B-6763, B-6765, B-6789, B-6790, B-6795, B-6811, B-6837, D-AVYF, MSN 5006
SELECTED NON PRECISION APPROACH The non precision approach is flown in selected modes (TRK-FPA or HDG-V/S) when: ‐ The approach is not stored in the database or ‐ GPS PRIMARY is lost and the NAV accuracy check is negative. INTERMEDIATE APPROACH Procedure USE TRK-FPA mode SELECT ND in the ROSE VOR mode KEEP the autothrust active USE managed speed FINAL APPROACH Upon reaching the final approach fix SELECT a final approach track on the FCU SELECT an FPA (flight path angle) to the final descent path angle Anticipate the selection of FPA to smooth the interception of the final path. Note:
If the pilot is using the AP, select the final FPA approximately 0.3 nm before the final approach fix.
SELECT a go around altitude on FCU. USE raw data to monitor aircraft position and flight path. At minimum: If visual references are acquired DISCONNECT the autopilot and continue the approach visually. If visual references are not acquired INITIATE a go around NON DIRECTIONAL BEACON (NDB) APPROACH TYPE When the flight plan calls for an NDB approach, the system automatically tunes the ADF, only when the aircraft is passing the first fix of the approach. Therefore, it is convenient to manually tune the ADF earlier (before activating the approach phase). Fly a Non Directional Beacon (NDB) approach as any non precision approach.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 36/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
LOC APPROACH TYPE SELECT the LOC pushbutton in intermediate approach, to arm the LOC mode. CAUTION
Do not select the APPR pushbutton.
SELECT the ND in ROSE LS mode. Upon reaching the final approach fix: MONITOR LOC engagement. SELECT the FPA to the final descent path angle. Note:
In case of a dual Radio Altimeter (RA) failure, the LOC pb can still be used to arm the LOC mode, as it does not depend on the RA signal.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←P
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 37/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
NON PRECISION APPROACH PROFILE Applicable to: ALL
MANAGED LATERAL AND SELECTED VERTICAL GUIDANCE
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
Q→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 38/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
LATERAL AND VERTICAL MANAGED GUIDANCE
CAUTION
When FINAL APP modes are engaged, the AP/FD will disengage: ‐ At the minimum - 50 ft (if entered) or at 400 ft AGL (if no minimum is entered), or ‐ At the Missed Approach Point (MAP), depending on which one comes first. The FDs will revert to basic modes (HDG-V/S or TRK-FPA).
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
←Q→
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 39/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
SELECTED GUIDANCE
Note:
If the distance to the runway is not properly assessed, a step descent approach may be considered and a level-off at minimum may be performed while searching for visual references. If the pilot has no visual reference at the MAP, at the latest, he must initiate a go-around. CIRCLING APPROACH
Applicable to: ALL
If the pilot chooses not to follow the SOP procedure, select both FDs OFF and fly visually.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← Q to R →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 40/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
If the runway in use is not the flight plan runway, the ground speed and the VAPP will not be computed properly, and the speed on final may be higher than excepted. Therefore, select the approach speed directly on the FCU. VISUAL APPROACH Applicable to: ALL
When flying visual, the pilot may select an appropriate STAR and RWY in use on the MCDU. The ND displays the extended runway centerline five nautical miles out from the runway. This helps the pilot during the final turn. Along with the FPV, the PFD displays a track bug that may help the pilot to fly the downwind leg and intercept final. The FPV should be flown laterally with reference to the track bug.
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
← R to S →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 41/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
←S
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 P 42/42 07 OCT 11
PROCEDURES NORMAL PROCEDURES A318/A319/A320/A321 FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEMS RELATED PROCEDURES - FMS
Go-Around MONITORING THE GO-AROUND Applicable to: ALL
Engage the GO-AROUND phase and GO-AROUND modes by setting the thrust levers to the TOGA position, if at least CONF1 is selected. When the GO-AROUND phase is engaged, the previously-flown approach is automatically strung back into the flight plan at the end of the missed approach procedure. In the GO-AROUND phase, the system makes no predictions. Consequently, CLB and DES modes are not available, and the flight crew must monitor constraints. When the aircraft leaves the GO-AROUND phase, all predictions and modes become available again. During a GO-AROUND phase, the managed speed is Green Dot.
HEADING/TRACK PRESET FUNCTION IN GO-AROUND PHASE The flight crew can use the heading/track preset, when LOC*, LOC, LAND, FINAL or GA is engaged. SET the appropriate heading, or track value, in the window of the FCU. When necessary, PULL the HDG/TRK selection knob to engage the mode on the preset value. GO-AROUND PROFILE Applicable to: ALL
WITH FD ON: Apply SOP procedures
CHH A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET FCOM
A to B →
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-80 P 1/6 07 OCT 11
View more...
Comments
